Home
        GUI Graphical User Interface: Rail Switch Power Smart (RSPS)
         Contents
1.               Table 15   Operation  frame in the Basic Settings Network IP Address Conflict  Detection dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 33    Basic Settings 1 2 Network    Configuration    Parameters Meaning  Detection Mode Specifies the procedure with which the device detects address conflicts     Possible values    Active and Passive  default setting    The device uses active and passive address conflict detection    Active   Active address conflict detection  The device actively avoids   communicating with an IP address that already exists in the network    The address conflict detection begins as soon as you connect the   device to the network or change its IP parameters        The device sends 4 ARP probe data packets at the interval  defined in the  Detection Delay  ms   field  If the device receives a  response to these data packets  there is an address conflict        If the device does not detect an address conflict  it sends 2  gratuitous ARP data packets as an announcement  The device  also sends these data packets when the address conflict  detection is switched off        Ifthe IP address already exists in the network  the device changes  back to the previously used IP parameters  if possible     If the device receives its IP parameters from a DHCP server  it  sends a DHCPDECLINE message back to the DHCP server        After the period specified in the  Release Delay  s   field  the  device checks whether the address conflict still exists  If the  device
2.       Possible values    Ignore  default setting    The device ignores this parameter    Monitor   The device changes the device status to Error in the following   situations        The device configuration only exists in the device        The device configuration in the device differs from the device  configuration on the external memory           Table 271  Monitoring  frame in the Diagnostics Status Configuration Device  Status dialog  cont         Propagate Connection Error    table    Parameters Meaning  Port Shows the number of the device port to which the table entry relates     Table 272  Propagate Connection Error  table in the Diagnostics Status  Configuration Device Status dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 283    Diagnostics 8 4 Status Configuration    Parameters Meaning  Propagate Defines whether the device monitors the link status of the port     Connection Error    Possible values     Selected   The device changes the device status to Error if the link at this port  is interrupted    Not selected  default setting    The device status remains unchanged if the link at this port is  interrupted        This setting is only effective if you have selected the value Monitor inthe   Connection error  field of the  Monitoring  frame     Table 272  Propagate Connection Error  table in the Diagnostics Status  Configuration Device Status dialog  cont         Propagate State    table    Parameters Meaning  Power Supply Number of the power supply that applies to this
3.     Activates deactivates the conditions configured in the  Link Flap  tab to  trigger an action     Possible values   Selected  The device monitors the port for the conditions configured in the  Link  Flap  table  When the configured condition occurs  the device  performs the action selected in the  Action  column   Not selected  default setting   Activates deactivates the conditions configured in the  CRC Fragments   tab to trigger an action     Possible values   Selected  The device monitors the port for the conditions configured in the   CRC Fragments  table  When the configured condition occurs  the  device performs the action selected in the  Action  column   Not selected  default setting     Activates deactivates the duplex mismatch condition to trigger an action     Possible values   Selected  The device monitors the port for a duplex mismatch  When a duplex  mismatch occurs  the device performs the action selected in the   Action  column   Not selected  default setting     Shows which configured condition caused an action to occur     Possible values    Link Flap   CRC Fragments   Duplex Missmatch  Defines an action to perform when the user defined port monitor  conditions occur     Possible values   Disable port  default setting   When the port monitor conditions occur  the device disables the port   To enable the port again click  Reset    Send trap  The device sends a trap to the management station  The prerequisite  for sending SNMP messages  traps  is that you t
4.     Security    Parameters  Access Challenges    Malformed Access  Responses    Bad Authenticators  Pending Requests  Timeouts  Unknown Types    Packets Dropped    2 5 RADIUS    Meaning   Shows the number of access challenge data packets that the device  received from the server    Shows the number of malformed access response data packets that the  device received from the server  including data packets with an invalid  length     Shows the number of access response data packets with an invalid  authenticator that the device received from the server    Shows the number of access request data packets that the device sent to  the server to which it has not yet received a response from the server   Shows how often no response to the server was received before the  specified waiting time elapsed    Shows the number data packets with an unknown data type that the  device received from the server on the authentication port    Shows the number of data packets that the device received from the  server on the authentication port and then discarded them     Table 86   RADIUS Authentication Statistics  dialog  table  cont      Buttons    Button  Reload    Help    Table 87  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Meaning    Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device     Opens the online help     107    Security 2 6 Pre login Banner    2 6 Pre login Banner    This dialog allows you to display a greeting or information text to user
5.    Button  Set    Reload    Help    Table 109  Buttons    128    Meaning   Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Opens the online help     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Time 3 3 PTP    3 3 2 Boundary Clock    With this menu you can configure the Boundary Clock mode for the local  clock     The menu contains the following dialogs   Boundary clock  Global  Boundary clock  Port    3 3 3 Boundary clock  Global    With this dialog you can enter general  cross port settings for the Boundary  Clock mode for the local clock  The Boundary Clock  BC  operates according  to PTP version 2  IEEE 1588 2008      The settings are effective when the local clock operates as the Boundary  Clock  BC   For this  you select the value v2 boundary clock in the  PTP  Mode  field in the Time  PTP Global dialog     Operation IEEE 1588 PTPv2 BC    Parameters Meaning  Priority 1 Defines priority 1 for the port     Possible values   0   255  default setting  128     The    Best Master Clock    algorithm first evaluates priority 1 of the  participating devices in order to determine the reference time source   Grandmaster     The lower you set this value  the more probable it is that the device  becomes the reference time source  Grandmaster     See    Grandmaster    o
6.    Config Priority  parameter       Security Management Access Server dialog   SNMP  tab page   Port  Number  parameter       Diagnostics System Selftest dialog   RAM Test  parameter       Diagnostics System Selftest dialog   Activate SysMon1  parameter       Diagnostics System Selftest dialog   Load default config on error   parameter          Table 2  Buttons in the status line  cont      Instructions for saving the device configuration    LI To copy changed settings to the volatile memory  RAM   click the  Set     button     LI To refresh the display in the dialogs  click the  Reload  button  L  To keep the changed settings even after restarting the device  click the    18     Save  button in the Basic Settings Load Save dialog     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Graphical User Interface    Note  Unintentional changes to the device configuration may cause the  connection between your PC and the device to be terminated  Before you  change the settings in the device  switch on the function  Undo  Modifications of Configuration  in the Basic Settings  Load Save dialog   With this function  the device restores the active device configuration  saved in the NVM if the connection is interrupted after the settings have  been changed  The device remains reachable     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 19    Graphical User Interface    RM GUI RSPS  20 Release 2 0 02 2013    Basic Settings    1 Basic Settings    With this menu you can configure the basic settings of the device     
7.    Minimum Lower Cases       Minimum Numbers       Minimum Special Characters          You configure the password rules in the Security User Management  dialog  in the  Password Policy  frame   Password strength Defines whether the device monitors the status of the function  Policy  check inactive Check      Possible values    Ignore  default setting    The device ignores this parameter    Monitor   The device changes the security status to the value Error if the  function  Policy Check  is deactivated for at least 1 user account        You configure the  Policy Check  function in the table in the  Security User Management dialog     Telnet Enabled Defines whether the device monitors the status of the Telnet server     Possible values    Ignore   The device ignores this parameter    Monitor  default setting    The device changes the security status to the value Error if the  Telnet server is enabled           You enable disable the Telnet server in the security Management  Access Server dialog  on the  Telnet  tab page     HTTP Enabled Defines whether the device monitors the status of the HTTP server     Possible values    Ignore   The device ignores this parameter    Monitor  default setting    The device changes the security status to the value Error if the  HTTP server is enabled           You enable disable the HTTP server in the Security Management  Access Server dialog  on the  HTTP  tab page     Table 277  Monitoring  frame in the Diagnostics Status Configuration Secur
8.    without synchronizing itself     The menu contains the following dialogs   Global  Boundary Clock  Transparent Clock    RM GUI RSPS  126 Release 2 0 02 2013    Time 3 3 PTP    3 3 1 Global    With this dialog you can configure basic settings for PTP     Operation IEEE 1588 PTP    Parameters Meaning   Operation When the function is switched on  the device synchronizes its clock with   IEEE 1588 PTP PTP  If SNTP is activated in the device at the same time  PTP has priority   When the function is switched off  the device transmits the PTP  synchronization messages without any correction at all device ports     Possible values   On  off  default setting              Table 106  Operation IEEE 1588 PTP  frame in the Time  PTP Global dialog    Configuration IEEE 1588 PTP    Parameters Meaning  PTP Mode Defines the PTP version and mode of the local clock     Possible values   v2 transparent clock  default setting   v2 boundary clock  Sync Lower Bound Defines the lower threshold value in nanoseconds for the path difference   ns  between the local clock and the reference time source  Grandmaster   If  the path difference falls below this value one time  then the local clock is  classed as synchronized     Possible values   0  999999999  default setting  30   Sync Upper Bound Defines the upper boundary in nanoseconds for the path difference   ns  between the local clock and the reference time source  Grandmaster   If  the path difference exceeds this value one time  then the local cl
9.   3 indicates that the device has  endpoint class 1  3 capabilities   A value of networkConnectivity indicates that the device has  network connectivity device capabilities   Shows the extension of the VLAN Identifier for the remote system  connected to this port  as defined in IEEE 802 1P 1998   The device uses a value of 1 through 4094 to define a valid Port  VLAN ID   The device shows a value of 0 for priority tagged frames  This means  that only the 802 1 p priority level is significant and the device uses the  default VLAN ID of the ingress port   The device reserves a value of 4095 for implementation     Shows the value of the 802 1 p priority which is associated with the remote  system connected to the port     Shows the value of the Differentiated Service Code Point  DSCP  which is  associated with the remote system connected to the port     Shows the unknown bit status of incoming traffic   A value of true indicates that the network policy for the specified  application type is currently unknown  In this case  the VLAN ID  ignores the Layer 2 priority and the  DSCP  value fields   A value of false indicates a defined network policy     Shows the tagged bit status   A value of true indicates that the application uses a tagged VLAN   A value of false indicates that for the specific application the device  uses untagged VLAN operation  In this case  the device ignores both  the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority fields whereas the  DSCP  value    is relevant     Shows the
10.   Assigns the device to a PTP domain     Possible values   0   255  default setting  0     The device only transmits time information from and to devices in the same  domain     Defines which protocol the device port uses to transmit the PTP  synchronization messages        Possible values    EEE 802 3  default setting   Defines the PTP domains in which the device corrects PTP synchronization  messages                    Possible values   Selected  The device corrects PTP synchronization messages in all PTP domains   Not selected  default setting   The device only corrects PTP synchronization messages in the primary  PTP domain   See the  Primary Domain  field   Defines the VLAN ID with which the device marks the PTP synchronization  messages at this port     Possible values    none  default setting    The device transmits PTP synchronization messages without a VLAN   marking    0  4042   You select VLANs that you have already set up in the device from the list   Defines the priority with which the device transmits the PTP synchronization  messages marked with a VLAN ID  Layer 2  IEEE 802 1p      Possible values   7  default setting  4     If you have defined the value  none  in the VLAN field  the device ignores the  VLAN priority     Table 118   Operation IEEE1588   PTPv2 TC  frame in the Time  PTP  Transparent  Clock Globa1 dialog  cont      140    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Time 3 3 PTP    Local Synchronization    Parameters Meaning    Syntonize Defines whether t
11.   Buttons  Button Meaning  Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device   Help Opens the online help     Table 218  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  242 Release 2 0 02 2013    Diagnostics 8 1 System    8 1 3 Selftest    This dialog allows you to do the following   Activate deactivate the RAM test when the device is being started   Enable disable the switch to the system monitor when the device is being  started   Defines how the device behaves in the case of an error     Configuration  Parameters Meaning  RAM Test Defines whether the device tests the RAM memory during the restart     Possible values   Selected  default setting   The device tests the RAM memory during the restart   Not selected  The device skips the memory test during the restart  This shortens the  start time for the device     Activate SysMon1 Activates deactivates the access to the system monitor during the restart     Possible values   Selected  default setting   The device allows you to switch to the system monitor during the  restart   Not selected  The device starts without the option to switch to the system monitor     Among other things  the system monitor allows you to update the device  software or delete saved device configurations   Load default config Activates deactivates the loading of the standard device configuration  on error  default configuration  if no readable device configuration is  available for the device when it is restarting           
12.   HTTPS  tab page    Note  When you switch off the server  the connection between the  graphical user interface  GUI  and the device is interrupted  To continue  working with the graphical user interface  switch the server on again via  the Command Line Interface  CLI      RM GUI RSPS  80 Release 2 0 02 2013    Security 2 3 Management Access  Configuration  Parameters Meaning    Listen TCP Port    Defines the number of the TCP port on which the server receives requests  from clients     Possible values   1  65535  default setting  443   Exception  Port 2222 is reserved for internal functions     The server restarts automatically after the port is changed  In the process   the device terminates open connections to the server     Table 54   Configuration  frame in the Security Management Access  Server dialog    HTTPS  tab page    Certificate    Parameters  Present    Create    Delete    Meaning  Shows whether the digital certificate is present in the device     Possible values   Selected  The certificate is present   Not selected  The certificate has been removed     Creates a digital certificate on the device     To get the server to use this certificate  you click  Set  and restart the  server  You can only restart the server via the Command Line Interface   CLI      Alternatively  you can copy your own certificate to the device   see the   Certificate Import  dialog     Deletes the digital certificate     To permanently remove the certificate from the device  save the chang
13.   IGMP MIB   The BSD Syslog Protocol  IGMPv3    Introduction and Applicability Statements for Internet Standard Management  Framework    An Architecture for Describing Simple Network Management Protocol  SNMP   Management Frameworks    Message Processing and Dispatching for the Simple Network Management  Protocol  SNMP     Simple Network Management Protocol  SNMP  Applications    User based Security Model  USM  for version 3 of the Simple Network  Management Protocol  SNMPv3     View based Access Control Model  VACM  for the Simple Network  Management Protocol  SNMP     Management Information Base  MIB   for the Simple Network Management Protocol  SNMP     802 1X RADIUS Usage Guidelines    Coexistence between Version 1  Version 2  and Version 3 of the Internet   standard Network Management Framework    Management Information Base for the Transmission Control Protocol  TCP   Management Information Base for the User Datagram Protocol  UDP   Definitions of Managed Objects for Bridges   SSH protocol architecture   SSH authentication protocol   SSH transport layer protocol   SSH connection protocol   Management Information Base for the Internet Protocol  IP    Definitions of Managed Objects for Bridges with Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol  Simple Network Time Protocol  SNTP  Version 4 for IPv4  IPv6 and OSI  Definitions of Managed Objects for Bridges with Traffic Classes  Multicast  Filtering  and Virtual LAN Extensions   Considerations for Internet Group Management Protocol  IGMP  a
14.   Loop Guard  function while the  Root Guard  function  is switched on  the device switches off the  Root Guard  function     Shows whether the loop state of the device port is inconsistent     Possible values   true  The loop state of the device port is inconsistent       The device port is not receiving any STP BPDUs and the    Root  Guard    function is switched on       The device sets the state of the device port to the value  discarding  The device thus prevents any potential loops   false  The loop state of the device port is consistent  The device port  receives STP BPDUs   Shows how often the device has set the value in the  Loop State  field from  false to true   Shows how often the device has set the value in the  Loop State  field from  true to false              Table 213   Guards  tab page in the Redundancy  Spanning Tree  Port dialog  section   x3c  tblsheetnum gt  of 3     236       RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Redundancy    Parameters    7 4 Spanning Tree    Meaning  BPDU Guard Effect Prerequisite     The device port is a manually defined edge port  terminal device port    In the  Port  dialog  the checkbox in the  Admin Edge Port  column is  Selected for this port    In the Redundancy  Spanning Tree Global dialog  the BPDU Guard  function is switched on     Shows whether the device port has received an STP BPDU as an edge  port  terminal device port      Possible values     disable   The device port is an edge port  terminal device port  and has not  
15.   O KNNNN    wnb ONDA    Statistics Table  Utilization  SFP    s Configuration  Device Status  Security Status  Signal Contact  MAC Notification  Alarms  Traps     w w w    t    ie   mi  c    ORWN      OO O0 00 00 00 00 U  O0 00 00 U O0 00 00 O0  UO  U    onL AAR AAA    Configuration  Topology Discovery    Na    Advanced    Telnet Client    Appendix    Technical Data   List of RFCs   Underlying IEEE Standards  Underlying IEC Norms  Underlying ANSI Norms  Maintenance   Literature references    260  263  264  265    266  266  267  268    280  281  286  291  297  299    301  301  305    309  310    311    312  313  315  316  317  318  319    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Contents    A 8 Copyright of Integrated Software 320  A 8 1 lighttpd 320  A 8 2 Expat 321  A 8 3 libcurl 322  A 8 4 libssh2 323  A 8 5 OpenSSH 324  A 8 6 OpenSSL 334  A 8 7 Parts of the FreeBSD IP stack 337   B Index 339   c Readers    Comments 342   D Further Support 345   RM GUI RSPS    Release 2 0 02 2013 7    Contents    RM GUI RSPS  8 Release 2 0 02 2013    About this Manual    About this Manual    The    GUI    reference manual contains detailed information on using the  graphical interface to operate the individual functions of the device     The    Command Line Interface    reference manual contains detailed  information on using the Command Line Interface to operate the individual  functions of the device     The    Installation    user manual contains a device description  safety  instructions  a
16.   Parameters Meaning    Default Passwords Defines whether the device monitors the password for the locally set up  not changed user accounts user and admin     Possible values    Ignore   The device ignores this parameter    Monitor  default setting    The device changes the security status to the value Error if the  password for the user or admin user account is unchanged from the  default setting           You set the password in the Security User Management dialog     Configured min  Defines whether the device monitors the password rule  Minimum  password length  lt 8 Password Length      Possible values    Ignore   The device ignores this parameter    Monitor  default setting    The device changes the security status to the value Error if the value  for the password rule is less than 8           You configure the password rules in the Security User Management  dialog  in the  Password Policy  frame     Table 277  Monitoring  frame in the Diagnostics Status Configuration Security  Status dialog  section  x3c  tblsheetnum gt  of 4     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 287    Diagnostics 8 4 Status Configuration    Parameters Meaning    Password strength Defines whether the device monitors the password rules     not configured  g Possible values     Ignore   The device ignores this parameter    Monitor  default setting    The device changes the security status to the value Error if the value  for at least one of the following password rules is 0        Minimum Upper Cases    
17.   Password  field displays the password in clear text   Access Role Defines the access role profile that regulates the user   s access to the  individual functions of the device     Possible values   guest  The user is authorized to monitor the device   operator  The user is authorized to monitor and configure the device   with the  exception of security settings for the access to the device   administrator  The user is authorized to monitor and configure the device   unauthorized  The user is blocked  and the device rejects the user s login   You assign this value to temporarily lock the user account  If an error  occurs when another access role is being assigned  the device  assigns this access role to the user account     User locked Locks unlocks the user   s access to the management functions of the  device     Possible values   Selected  The user   s access is locked   Not selected  The user   s access is unlocked     Table 39   New Entry  frame in the Security User Management dialog  section   x3c  tblsheetnum gt  of 3     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 67    Security    Parameters  Policy Check    SNMP Auth Type    SNMP Encryption  Type    2 1 User Management    Meaning    Defines whether the device checks the password according to the defined  policy when it is being set up or changed     Possible values   Selected  The device checks the password according to the policy defined in the   Password Policy  frame   Not selected  The device accepts the password without 
18.   Possible values   Osa  none    Deactivates the Voice VLAN Priority of the port     Table 164  Table in the switching VLAN  Voice dialog  cont         Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Help Opens the online help     Table 165  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 187    Switching 5 5 VLAN    RM GUI RSPS  188 Release 2 0 02 2013    QoS Priority    6 QoS Priority    Communication networks transmit a number of applications at the same time  that have different requirements as regards availability  bandwidth and  latency periods     QoS  Quality of Service  is a procedure defined in IEEE 802 1D  It is used to  distribute resources in the network  You therefore have the possibility of  providing minimum bandwidth for important applications  Prerequisite for this  is that the end devices and the devices in the network support prioritized data  transmission  Data packets with high priority are given preference when  transmitted by devices in the network  You transfer data packets with lower  priority when there are no data packets with a higher priority to be  transmitted     The device provides the following setting options   You specify how the device evaluates QoS prioritization information for  in
19.   Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright     notice  this list of conditions and the following disclaimer      2  Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright     notice  this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the     documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution      THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR    AS IS  AND     ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT    LIMITED TO  THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY     AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED    IN  NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT      INDIRECT  INCIDENTAL  SPECIAL  EXEMPLARY  OR     CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED TO     PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES  LOSS     OF USE  DATA  OR PROFITS  OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION      HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY      WHETHER IN CONTRACT  STRICT LIABILITY  OR TORT     INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE  ARISING IN ANY WAY    OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE  EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE    POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE     8  Portable OpenSSH contains the following additional licenses     a  md5crypt c  md5dcrypt h      THE BEER WARE LICENSE   Revision 42        lt phk login dknet dk gt  wrote this file  As long as you retain this    notice you can do whatever you want with this stuff  If we meet    some day  and you think this stuff is worth it  you can buy me a    beer in return  Poul Henning Kamp    b  snpr
20.   SSH Activates deactivates the SSH access     Possible values   Selected  default setting   Access is activated for the adjacent IP address range   Not selected  Access is deactivated     Active Activates deactivates the table entry     Possible values   Selected  default setting   Table entry is activated  The device restricts access to its  management functions to the adjacent IP address range and the  selected IP based applications   Not selected  Table entry is deactivated     Table 67  Table inthe security Management Access IP Access Restriction dialog     cont      In the state on delivery  there is a default entry in the table for the IP  address range 0 0 0 0 0  in which the access for all applications is  activated  This table entry allows you access to the device regardless of  your location  e g  to initially configure the function  You have the option  to change or delete this table entry  When you create a new table entry it  has the same properties     Note  To start the graphical user interface in a Web browser  you require  the  HTTP  or  HTTPS  service  For the graphical user interface to have  access to the device  the  SNMP  service is also required  If you are using  the graphical user interface outside the Web browser  you only require the   SNMP  service     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Security    Buttons    Button  Set    Reload    Create  Remove  Help    Table 68  Buttons    2 3 9 Web    2 3 Management Access    Meaning    Transfers the change
21.   The device automatically detects whether other devices in the network  expect the PTP synchronization messages to be the same length as  PTPv1 messages  If this is the case  the device extends the length of  the PTP synchronization messages before transmitting them   on  The device extends the length of the PTP synchronization messages  before transmitting them              O  The device transmits PTP synchronization messages without  changing the length   Asymmetry Corrects the measured delay value corrupted by asymmetrical  transmission paths     Possible values    2000000000  2000000000  default setting  0     The value represents the delay symmetry in nanoseconds   A measured delay value of x ns corresponds to an asymmetry of x 2 ns   The value is positive if the delay from the PTP master to the PTP slave is  longer than in the opposite direction    VLAN Defines the VLAN ID with which the device marks the PTP  synchronization messages at this port     Possible values   none  default setting   The device transmits PTP synchronization messages without a VLAN  marking   0  4042  You select VLANs that you have already set up in the device from the  list     Make sure that the device port is a member of the VLAN   See the switching VLAN Static dialog    VLAN Priority Defines the priority with which the device transmits the PTP  synchronization messages marked with a VLAN ID  Layer 2   IEEE 802 1p      Possible values   0  7  default setting  4     If you have defined the val
22.   The signal contact ignores this parameter    Monitor  default setting    The signal contact opens if the temperature exceeds   falls below the  threshold values        You define the temperature thresholds in the Basic Settings System  dialog  in the  Temperature    C   field    Connection error Defines whether the signal contact monitors the link status of the device  ports     Possible values    Ignore  default setting   The signal contact ignores this parameter   Monitor  The signal contact opens if the link on a device port is interrupted   You have the option of selecting the device ports to be monitored  individually    ENVM removal Defines whether the signal contact monitors the external memory        Possible values   Ignore  default setting   The signal contact ignores this parameter   Monitor  The signal contact opens if you remove the external memory from the  device        Table 282  Monitoring Correct Operation  frame in the Diagnostics Status  Configuration Signal Contact dialog       RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 293    Diagnostics 8 4 Status Configuration    Parameters Meaning    ENVM notin Sync Defines whether the signal contact monitors the synchronization of the  device configuration in the device and on the external memory     Possible values    Ignore  default setting    The signal contact ignores this parameter    Monitor   The signal contact opens in the following situations        The device configuration only exists in the device        The devic
23.   default setting    The device ignores this parameter    Monitor   The device changes the safety status to the value Error if the device  also saves the device configuration on the external memory           You enable disable the saving of the device configuration on the external  memory in the Basic Settings External Memory dialog        Table 277  Monitoring  frame in the Diagnostics Status Configuration Security  Status dialog  section  x3c  tblsheetnum gt  of 4     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    289    Diagnostics    Parameters    Active Port without  link    HiDiscovery  Enabled    8 4 Status Configuration    Meaning    Defines whether the device monitors the link status of the enabled device  ports     Possible values    Ignore  default setting   The device ignores this parameter   Monitor  The device changes the security status to the value Error if the link  on an enabled device port is interrupted   You have the option of selecting the device ports to be monitored  individually    Defines whether the device monitors the status of HiDiscovery           Possible values    Ignore   The device ignores this parameter    Monitor  default setting    The device changes the Security Status to the value Error if   Operation  for the HiDiscovery Protocol is On and  Access  is  readWrite           You enable disable the HiDiscovery Protocol in the Basic  Settings  Network dialog in the  HiDiscovery Protocol  frame     Table 277  Monitoring  frame in the Diagnostics Status 
24.   default setting   Selected    If the threshold value is exceeded  the device discards the excess  Multicast data packets on this port     Activates deactivates the rate limiter function for received Unicast data  packets with an unknown destination address     Possible values   Not selected  default setting   Selected    If the threshold value is exceeded  the device discards the excess Unicast  data packets on this port     Table 130  Table in the  Ingress  tab of the Switching Rate Limiter dialog  cont      156    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Switching 5 2 Rate Limiter    Egress    On this tab you activate the rate limiter function for data packets to be  sent  By entering a threshold value you define the maximum amount of  traffic the port transmits on the egress side  If the traffic on this port  exceeds the threshold value  the device discards the excess traffic on this  port     Parameters Meaning  Port Shows the number of the device port to which the table entry relates   Bandwidth     Defines the threshold value for data packets to be sent on this port     Possible values   0   100  default setting  0     The threshold value is entered as a percentage of the data rate of the port   Enter the percentage of the data rate of the port between 0 and 100   The value 0 deactivates the rate limiter function on this port     Table 131  Table in the  Egress  tab of the switching Rate Limiter dialog    Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile
25.   function     Possible values   Selected  The device port remains physically switched on  A connected device  receives an active link   Not selected  default setting   The device port is physically switched off     Defines how the device port behaves when no cable is connected     Possible values   no power save  default setting   The device port remains activated   auto power down  The device port switches to the energy saving mode   unsupported  The device port does not support this function and remains activated     Activates deactivates the automatic configuration of the device port     Possible values   Selected  default setting   This setting has priority over the manual configuration of the device  port   The device port negotiates the operating mode independently using  autonegotiation and detects the devices connected to the TP port  automatically  Auto Cable Crossing    After the function is switched on  it takes a few seconds for the device  port to set the operating mode   Not selected  The device port works with the values you defined in the  Manual  Configuration  column and the  Manual Cable Crossing  Auto  Conf   off   column     Defines the operating mode of the device port when the automatic  configuration of the device port is deactivated     Possible values    10 Mbit s HDX   Half duplex connection   10 Mbit s FDX   Full duplex connection   100 Mbit s HDX   Half duplex connection   100 Mbit s FDX  default setting   Full duplex connection                Th
26.   information to neighboring devices   Receive and Transmit  default setting   The device port transmits LLDP data packets and stores information  about neighboring devices   Disable  The device port transmits no LLDP data packets and stores no  information about neighboring devices     Notification Enabled Specifies whether LLDP notifications are enabled on this device port        Possible values   Selected  LLDP notifications are enabled on this device port   Not selected  default setting   LLDP notifications are disabled on this device port   Transmit Port Specifies whether the device transmits a TLV  Type Length Value  with  Description the port description     Possible values   Selected  default setting   The device transmits a TLV with the port description   Not selected  The device does not transmit a TLV with the port description   Transmit System Specifies whether the device transmits a TLV  Type Length Value  with  Name the device name     Possible values   Selected  default setting   The device transmits a TLV with the device name   Not selected  The device does not transmit a TLV with the device name   Transmit System Specifies whether the device transmits a TLV  Type Length Value  with  Description the system description     Possible values   Selected  default setting   The device transmits a TLV with the system description   Not selected  The device does not transmit a TLV with the system description     Table 297  Table in the Diagnostics LLDP Configuration dia
27.   min      System Time     System Time   UTC      Possible values    780  840  default value  60     The device determines the time zone on your PC and uses it to calculate  the difference between the local time and the  System Time  UTC       Table 91   Configuration  frame in the  Global  tab of the Time Basic Settings    Table 92  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    dialog  cont    Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Help Opens the online help     113    Time 3 1 Basic Settings    3 1 2 Daylight Saving Time    On this tab you activate the automatic daylight saving time switching  You  select the beginning and the end of summertime using a predefined profile   or you define these settings individually  During summertime  the device puts  the local time forward by 1 hour     Operation  Parameters Meaning  Operation When the function is switched on  the device automatically switches    between summertime and wintertime     Possible values   On  off  default setting              The device switches at the times specified in the  Summertime Begin  and   Summertime End  frames     Profile    Opens the  Profile  dialog  There you select a predefined configuration for  the beginning and the end of 
28.   user manual contains detailed information about  setting the temperature thresholds     Table 5   System Data  frame in the Basic Settings  System dialog  cont      24    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Basic Settings    Device View    1 1 System    The display in this frame shows a simplified version of the structure of the  device and its equipment  The display also shows the states of the device  status LEDs and the device ports at the time of the last update    The following symbols represent the status of the individual device ports   In some situations  some of these symbols interfere with one another  You  get a detailed description of the port status when you position the mouse  pointer over the port symbol     Criterion Symbol  Bandwidth of the    10 Mbit s  device port Port activated  connection okay  full duplex mode  2 100 Mbit s  Port activated  connection okay  full duplex mode    1000 Mbit s    Operating state          AdminLink    u    u    Port activated  connection okay  full duplex mode   Half duplex mode activated   See the Basic Settings Port Configuration dialog   Automatic  Configuration  checkbox     Autonegotiation activated  See the Basic Settings Port Configuration dialog   Automatic  Configuration  checkbox     Port is blocked by a redundancy function   Port is deactivated  connection okay  Port is deactivated  no connection set up    See Basic Settings Port Configuration dialog   Port on   checkbox and  Link Current Settings  field     Table
29.  2 network     Possible values   0   200000000  0  The device takes over the role of the root bridge     Topology Change Shows how often the device has put a device port into the forwarding       Count status via Spanning Tree since it was started   Time Since Shows the time since the last topology change   Topology Change    Possible values    lt days  hours minutes seconds gt     Table 210  Topology  column in  Protocol Configuration   Information  frame in the  Redundancy  Spanning Tree Global dialog  cont         Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Help Opens the online help     Table 211  Buttons    7 4 2 Port    With this dialog you can switch the Spanning Tree function on off on the  device ports  specify edge ports  and define the settings for various  protection functions     RM GUI RSPS  230 Release 2 0 02 2013    Redundancy 7 4 Spanning Tree    CIST    On this tab page you can switch the Spanning Tree function on off on the  device ports individually  define the settings for edge ports  and view the  current values  The abbreviation CIST stands for Common and Internal  Spanning Tree     Note  If you are using other layer 2 redundancy protocols parallel to  Spanning Tree on the device  Switch o
30.  2013 111    Time 3 1 Basic Settings    3 1 Basic Settings    With this dialog you can define time related settings independently of the  time synchronization protocol selected     The dialog contains the following tabs     Global  Daylight Saving Time    3 1 1 Global    On this tab you define the time zone to which the system time in the device  refers     Configuration    Parameters Meaning    System Time  UTC  Displays the current date and time with reference to Universal Time  Coordinated  UTC      System Time Displays the current date and time with reference to the local time    System Time     System Time  UTC      Local Offset  min      Daylight  Saving Time     Set Time from PC The device uses the time on the PC as the system time     Table 91   Configuration  frame in the  Global  tab of the Time Basic Settings  dialog    RM GUI RSPS  112 Release 2 0 02 2013    Time    3 1 Basic Settings    Parameters    Time Source    Meaning    Shows the time source from which the device gets the time information     The device automatically selects the available time source with the  greatest accuracy     Possible values   local  System clock of the device   sntp  The SNTP client is activated and the device is synchronized by an  SNTP server   ptp  PTP is activated and the clock of the device is synchronized with a  PTP master clock     Defines the difference between the local time and the  System Time    Local Offset  min     Set Offset from PC     UTC   in minutes   Local Offset
31.  3 3 PTP    Status IEEE1588   PTPv2 TC    Parameters Meaning   Clock Identity Shows the device   s own identification number  UUID    The device shows the identities as byte sequences in hexadecimal  notation     The device identification number consists of the MAC address of the    device  with the values f   and fe added between byte 3 and byte 4                 Table 120  Status IEEE1588   PTPv2 TC  frame in the Time  PTP  Transparent  Clock Globa1l dialog    Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Help Opens the online help     Table 121  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  142 Release 2 0 02 2013    Time 3 3 PTP    3 3   Transparent clock  Port    With this dialog you can define special settings for the Transparent Clock   TC  on each individual device port     The settings are effective when the local clock operates as the Transparent  Clock  TC   For this  you select the value v2 transparent clock in the   PTP Version Mode  field in the Time  PTP Global dialog     Table  Parameters Meaning  Port Shows the number of the device port to which the table entry relates   PTP Enable Specifies whether the device port transmits PTP synchronization    messages     Possible values   Selected  default setting   The device po
32.  5  default setting  0     If the user makes one more unsuccessful login attempt  the device locks  access for the user    The device only allows users with the Administrator access role to  remove the lock     The value 0 deactivates the lock  The user can make unlimited attempts  to login     Table 36   Configuration  frame in the Security User Management dialog    RM GUI RSPS  62 Release 2 0 02 2013    Security    2 1 User Management    Password policy    This frame allows you to define the policy for valid passwords  The device  checks every new password and password change according to this    policy     The settings affect the  Password  field  The prerequisite is that the   Policy Check  must be checkmarked     Parameters  Minimum Password  Length    Minimum Upper  Cases    Minimum Lower  Cases    Minimum Numbers    Minimum Special  Characters    Meaning    The device accepts the password if it contains at least the number of  characters specified here    The device checks the password according to this setting  regardless of  the setting for the  Policy Check  checkbox     Possible values   6  64  default setting  6     The device accepts the password if it contains at least as many upper   case letters as specified here     Possible values   0  16  default setting  1     The value 0 deactivates this setting     The device accepts the password if it contains at least as many lower case  letters as specified here     Possible values   0  16  default setting  1     The 
33.  6  Symbols identifying the status of the device ports    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    25    Basic Settings 1 1 System    Reloading    The graphical user interface automatically updates the display of the  dialog every 100 seconds  In the process  it updates the fields and  symbols with the values that are saved in the volatile memory  RAM  of the  device  At the bottom left of the dialog  you will find the time of the next  update     Reloading data in 70s    Figure 5  Time to next Reload    Note  The graphical user interface uses this function to update only the  display in the Basic Settings System dialog     Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Help Opens the online help     Table 7  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  26 Release 2 0 02 2013    Basic Settings 1 2 Network    1 2 Network    This dialog allows you to define settings for the access to the device  management via the network  In addition  you see the addresses of the  neighboring devices attached to the device and can detect and resolve  address conflicts     The menu contains the following dialogs   Global  ARP Table  IP Address Conflict Detection    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 27    Basic Settings 1 2 Network    1 2 1 Global    This dialo
34.  BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT   INDIRECT  INCIDENTAL  SPECIAL  EXEMPLARY  OR CONSEQUENTIAL  DAMAGES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED TO  PROCUREMENT OF  SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES  LOSS OF USE  DATA  OR  PROFITS  OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION  HOWEVER CAUSED AND  ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY  WHETHER IN CONTRACT  STRICT  LIABILITY  OR TORT  INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE   ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE  EVEN  IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 337    Appendix A 8 Copyright of Integrated Software    RM GUI RSPS  338 Release 2 0 02 2013    Index    B index    1  802 1D p Mapping    A   Aging time   Aging time  address table   Alarms   ARP table   Audit trail  log   Authentication list    B  Basic settings  Bridge  RSTP     Cc   Certificate  HTTPS    CLI   Command Line Interface  Community name  SNMPv1 v2   Configuration check  Configuration encryption    D   Denial of Service   Device Status   Device status   DoS   Download Java applet  GUI   DSCP  IP DSCP mapping     E   Egress rate limiter   ENVM   ENVM  external memory   Encryption  device configuration   Events   External memory    F  FAQ   FDB   Filter for MAC addresses  Fingerprint  SSH    Flash memory  status   Flow control   Forwarding database    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    195    32  153  152  299    265  69    152  153  158    G  Graphical User Interface  GUI     13  Guards 235  H  Hardware clock 111  Hardware state 263  HiDiscovery 29  High availabilit
35.  Clock Globa1 dialog  cont      Identities  Parameters Meaning  Clock Identity Shows the device   s own identification number  UUID      Parent Port Identity Shows the port identification number  UUID  of the directly superior  master device     Grandmaster Shows the identification number  UUID  of the reference clock device   Identity    Table 112   Identities  frame in the Time  PTP Boundary Clock Global dialog    The device shows the identities as byte sequences in hexadecimal  notation     The identification numbers  UUID  are made up as follows   The device identification number consists of the MAC address of the  device  with the values      and fe added between byte 3 and byte 4   The port UUID consists of the device identification number followed by  a 16 bit port ID     Grandmaster    This frame shows the criteria that the    Best Master Clock    algorithm  evaluates when determining the reference clock  Grandmaster      RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 131    Time 3 3 PTP    The    Best Master Clock    algorithm first evaluates priority 1 of the  participating devices  The device with the smallest value for priority 1  becomes the reference clock  Grandmaster   If the value is the same for  multiple devices  the algorithm takes the next criterion  and if this is also  the same  it takes the next criterion after this one  If all the values are the  same for multiple devices  the smallest value in the  Clock Identity  field  decides which device becomes the reference 
36.  Defines the IP address or hostname of the email server     Possible values   Valid IP address  default setting  0 0 0 0   Hostname in the format host  name or subdomain host name    Defines the SMTP port number     Possible values   1  65535  default setting  25   Exception  Port 2222 is reserved for internal functions   A value of 0 returns the feature to the default setting     Defines the authentication mechanism     Possible values   none  default setting   tisvl  Use this value when authenticating with a  User ID  and  Password      Defines the user id to use to authenticate the switch   Prerequisite for this function is that you configure the  Security  function  as tlsvl     Possible values   0  255 alphanumeric characters    Defines the password to use to authenticate the device   Prerequisite for this function is that you configure the  Security  function  as tlsvl     Possible values   0  255 alphanumeric characters    Activates deactivates the email message handling for this row     Possible values   Selected  The device sends an email message according to the user defined  configuration   Not selected  default setting        Table 234  Table in the Diagnostics Report Email Logging Global dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    255    Diagnostics    Buttons    Button  Set    Reload    Create  Remove  Send  Test  Help    Table 235  Buttons    8 2 Report    Meaning    Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the ch
37.  EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH     DAMAGE       The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or     derivative of this code cannot be changed  i e  this code cannot simply be    copied and put under another distribution licence      including the GNU Public Licence            RM GUI RSPS  336 Release 2 0 02 2013    Appendix A 8 Copyright of Integrated Software    A 8 7 Parts of the FreeBSD IP stack  Copyright  c  1990  1993    The Regents of the University of California  All rights reserved   Redistribution and use in source and binary forms  with or without  modification  are permitted provided that the following conditions are met     1  Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright  notice  this list of conditions and the following disclaimer     2  Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright  notice  this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the  documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution     3  Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors  may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software  without specific prior written permission     THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND  CONTRIBUTORS    AS IS  AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED  WARRANTIES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED TO  THE IMPLIED  WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA  PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED  IN NO EVENT SHALL  THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS
38.  Election Participate  Mode    Meaning  Shows the ID of the VLAN to which the table entry applies   Activates deactivates the IGMP Snooping Querier function for this VLAN     Possible values   off  default setting   The IGMP Snooping Querier function is deactivated for this VLAN   Active  The IGMP Snooping Querier function is activated for this VLAN   Shows whether the Snooping Querier is actually active for this VLAN              Possible values   inactive  default setting   Active  The Snooping Querier is active for this VLAN   Off  The Snooping Querier function is inactive for this VLAN   Activates deactivates the Snooping Querier in the selection process if the  device detects other queriers in the VLAN              Possible values    off  default setting    Active   If the Snooping Querier detects a querier source address that is better   i e  smaller  than the existing one  the device stops sending out  queries  The Snooping Querier that wins the selection process  continues sending out the queries              Table 150  Table in the switching  IGMP  Querier dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    173    Switching 5 4 IGMP    Parameters Meaning    Address Defines the IP address that the device adds as the sender address in  generated general query data packets  You use the address of the  Multicast router     Possible values   Valid IP Multicast address  default setting  0 0 0 0     Protocol Version Shows the IGMP protocol version of the general query data packet
39.  Encryption  frame in the Basic Settings Load Save dialog   section  x3c  tblsheetnum gt  of 2     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 41    Basic Settings    Parameters  Set Password    Delete    1 4 Load Save    Meaning   Encrypts configuration profiles and uses a password to make   unauthorized access more difficult    O Enter the new password in the  Set Password  dialog    O When you are changing an existing password  you also enter the   existing password    O Select the  Save Configuration afterwards  checkbox to use  encryption for the  Selected  configuration profile in the non volatile  memory  NVM  and in the external memory  ENVM            Note  Only use this function if a maximum of 1 configuration profile is  stored in the non volatile memory  NvM  of the device  Before creating  additional configuration profiles  decide for or against permanently  activated configuration encryption in the device  Save additional  configuration profiles either unencrypted or encrypted with the same  password     If you are replacing a device with an encrypted configuration profile  e g   due to a defect  you proceed as follows    Restart the new device and assign the IP parameters    Open the Basic Settings  Load Save dialog on the new device   Encrypt the configuration profile in the new device   see above  Enter  the same password you used in the existing device    Install the external memory from the existing device in the new device   Restart the new device    When it is resta
40.  Existing  connections remain in place     Connection Count Shows how many clients are currently logged on to the server   Possible values   Oe D    Table 48   Configuration  frame in the Security Management Access Server dialog    Telnet  tab page  section  x3c  tblsheetnum gt  of 2     RM GUI RSPS  76 Release 2 0 02 2013    Security    Parameters    Max  Number of  Connections    Session Timeout   min     2 3 Management Access    Meaning  Defines how many clients can be logged on to the server at the same time   Possible values    O29  Defines the timeout in minutes  After the device has been inactive for this  time it ends the session for the user logged on     Possible values   0   160  default setting  5     The value 0 deactivates the function  The user remains logged on when  inactive     Table 48   Configuration  frame in the Security Management Access Server dialog    Telnet  tab page  section  x3c  tblsheetnum gt  of 2     Buttons    Button  Set    Reload    Help    Table 49  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Meaning    Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings Load Save dialog and click  Save      Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device     Opens the online help     TT    Security 2 3 Management Access    2 3 4 Server  HTTP  This tab allows you to define settings for the HTTP server of the device and  t
41.  H  HIRSCHMANN    A BELDEN BRAND    Reference Manual    GUI Graphical User Interface  Rail Switch Power Smart  RSPS     RM GUI RSPS Technical Support  Release 2 0 02 2013 https   hirschmann support belden eu com    The naming of copyrighted trademarks in this manual  even when not specially indicated  should  not be taken to mean that these names may be considered as free in the sense of the trademark  and tradename protection law and hence that they may be freely used by anyone        2013 Hirschmann Automation and Control GmbH    Manuals and software are protected by copyright  All rights reserved  The copying  reproduction   translation  conversion into any electronic medium or machine scannable form is not permitted   either in whole or in part  An exception is the preparation of a backup copy of the software for  your own use  For devices with embedded software  the end user license agreement on the  enclosed CD DVD applies     The performance features described here are binding only if they have been expressly agreed  when the contract was made  This document was produced by Hirschmann Automation and  Control GmbH according to the best of the company s knowledge  Hirschmann reserves the right  to change the contents of this document without prior notice  Hirschmann can give no guarantee  in respect of the correctness or accuracy of the information in this document     Hirschmann can accept no responsibility for damages  resulting from the use of the network  components 
42.  Meaning    Index Shows a sequential number to which the table entry relates   The device automatically defines this number     Possible values   1  16    When you delete a table entry  this leaves a gap in the numbering  When  you create a new table entry  the device fills the first gap     IP Address Range Specifies the IP address range for which you define the access to the  management functions with this table entry     Possible values   Valid IPv4 address and netmask in CIDR notation  0 0 0 0 0  default setting for all newly created entries     HTTP Activates deactivates the HTTP access     Possible values   selected  default setting   Access is activated for the adjacent IP address range   not selected  Access is deactivated     HTTPS Activates deactivates the HTTPS access     Possible values   Selected  default setting   Access is activated for the adjacent IP address range   Not selected  Access is deactivated     Table 67  Table in the securi ty Management Access IP Access Restriction  dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 89    Security    Parameters  SNMP    2 3 Management Access    Meaning  Activates deactivates the SNMP access     Possible values   Selected  default setting   Access is activated for the adjacent IP address range   Not selected  Access is deactivated     Telnet Activates deactivates the Telnet access     Possible values   selected  default setting   Access is activated for the adjacent IP address range   not selected  Access is deactivated   
43.  Removes the selected table entry   Opens the online help     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Diagnostics 8 5 LLDP    8 5 LLDP    The device allows you to gather information about neighboring devices  For  this  the device uses the Link Layer Discovery Protocol  LLDP   This  information enables a network management station to map the structure of  your network     This menu allows you to configure the topology discovery and to display the  information received in table form     The menu contains the following dialogs   Configuration  Topology Discovery    8 5 1 Configuration    This dialog allows you to configure the topology discovery for every device  port     Operation  Parameters Meaning  Operation If the function is switched on  the topology discovery with LLDP is    activated on the device     Possible values   On  default setting   Off    Table 295   Operation  frame in the Diagnostics LLDP Configuration dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 301    Diagnostics 8 5 LLDP    Configuration    Parameters Meaning    Transmit Interval  s  Defines the interval in seconds at which the device transmits LLDP data  packets     Possible values   5   32768  default setting  30   Transmit Interval Defines the factor for determining the time to live value for the LLDP data  Multiplier packets     Possible values   2  10  default setting  4     The time to live value coded in the LLDP header results from multiplying  this value with the value in the  Transmit Interval  s   fie
44.  STP role  designated     Possible values    Not selected  default setting    The monitoring of STP BPDUs is switched off    Selected   The monitoring of STP BPDUs is switched on        Ifthe device port receives an STP BPDU with better path  information to the root bridge  the device discards the STP BPDU  and sets the state of the device port to the value discarding  instead of to root         Ifthere are no STP BPDUs with better path information to the root  bridge  after 2 x  Hello Time  the device resets the state of the  device port to a value according to the port role     If you switch on the  Root Guard  function while the  Loop Guard  function  is switched on  the device switches off the  Loop Guard  function     TCN Guard Switches the monitoring of Topology Change Notifications on off on the  device port  With this setting the device helps you protect your network  from attacks with STP BPDUs that try to change the topology     Possible values    Not selected  default setting    The monitoring of Topology Change Notifications is switched off    If the device receives STP BPDUs with a Topology Change flag  it   deletes the address table  FDB  of the device port and forwards the   Topology Change Notifications    Selected   The monitoring of Topology Change Notifications is switched on        The device port ignores the Topology Change flag in received  STP BPDUs        If the received BPDU contains other information that causes a  topology change  the device process
45.  Snooping Querier settings globally  and for the VLANs that are set up     Operation  Parameters Meaning  Operation Activates deactivates the IGMP Querier function globally in the device     Possible values   On    off  default setting              Table 148  Operation  frame in the Switching  IGMP Querier dialog    Configuration    In this frame you define the IGMP Snooping Querier settings for the  general query data packets     Parameters Meaning  Protocol Version Defines the IGMP version of the general query data packets     Possible values   1  IGMP v1   2  IGMP v2  default setting   3  IGMP v3   Query Interval Defines the time in seconds after which the device generates general  query data packets itself when it has received query data packets from the  Multicast router     Possible values   1  1800  default setting  60     Table 149  Configuration  frame in the switching  IGMP Querier dialog    RM GUI RSPS  172 Release 2 0 02 2013    Switching    Parameters  Expiry Interval    5 4 IGMP    Meaning   Defines the time in seconds after which an active querier switches from the  passive state back to the active state if it has not received any query  packets for longer than the expiry interval     Possible values   60   300  default setting  125     Table 149  Configuration  frame in the switching  IGMP Querier dialog  cont      Table    In the table you define the Snooping Querier settings for the VLANs that    are set up     Parameters  VLAN ID  Active    Current State   
46.  VLAN Unaware Mode is  switched off   see the Switching Global dialog        Table   Parameters Meaning   VLAN ID ID of the VLAN   The device supports up to 16 VLANs set up simultaneously   Possible values    1  4042   Name Name of the VLAN   The device automatically specifies the name  You can change the name at  any time     Possible values   1  32 alphanumeric characters  state on delivery  default for VLAN 1   otherwise VLANxxxx        Table 159  Table in the switching VLAN Static dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 181    Switching    Parameters  Port    5 5 VLAN    Meaning    Defines on which ports the device transmits the data packets for the  corresponding VLANs  and how it handles the VLAN tagging     Possible values        state on delivery    The port does not transmit any data packets for the VLAN  The port is  not a member of the VLAN    T   The port transmits data packets with a VLAN tag  tagged     You use this setting for an uplink connection  for example    U  state on delivery for VLAN 1    The port transmits data packets without a VLAN tag  untagged     Use this setting if the connected terminal device does not evaluate any  VLAN tags    F   The port does not transmit any data packets  neither from static nor  dynamic VLANs  forbidden     Use this setting if the connected terminal device does not evaluate any  VLAN tags     Table 159  Table in the switching VLAN  Static dialog  cont      Note  When configuring the VLAN  ensure that the management sta
47.  a request  to an authentication server before it retransmits the request     Possible values   1  30  default setting  5   NAS IP Address Defines the IP address that the device transfers to the authentication   Attribute 4  server as attribute 4  Enter the IP address of the device or another freely  selectable address     Possible values   Valid IPv4 address  default setting  0 0 0 0     In many cases  there is a firewall between the device and the  authentication server  In the Network Address Translation  NAT  in the  firewall the original IP address changes  and the authentication server  receives the translated IP address of the device    The IP address in this field is transferred unchanged by the device across  the Network Address Translation  NAT      Table 82   RADIUS Configuration  frame in the Security RADIUS Globa1 dialog    Buttons    Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device     Table 83  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 103    Security 2 5 RADIUS    Button Meaning   Clear Radius Deletes the statistics in the Security RADIUS  Authentication Statistics  Statistics     dialog and in the Security RADIUS Accounting Statistics dialog    Help Opens the online help     Table 83  Buttons  cont      2 5 2 A
48.  a restart     To permanently save the changes  choose the  selected  configuration profile in  the Basic Settings Load Save dialog and click  Save      The device automatically compares the configuration profiles once a minute  To  refresh the display manually  click the   button  If the device configurations  match  the button is hidden     By right clicking this symbol you can open the Basic Settings  Load Save dialog  directly     When you position the mouse pointer over the button  the user interface opens  a bubble help with the following information    The  Last Update  section shows the time at which the device last refreshed   the values    The  Device Status  section shows a compressed view of the  Device   Status  frame in the Basic Settings System dialog  The section shows the   alarm that is currently active and whose occurrence was recorded first    The  Security Status  section shows a compressed view of the  Security   Status  frame in the Basic Settings System dialog  The section shows the   alarm that is currently active and whose occurrence was recorded first    The  Boot Parameter  section shows a note if you permanently save   changes to the device configuration and at least one boot parameter differs   from the device configuration used during the last restart    The following settings cause the boot parameters to change        Basic Settings External Memory dialog   Enable Automatic Software  Update  parameter       Basic Settings External Memory dialog
49.  a trap to the management station     Last MAC Status Shows the status of the last MAC address on this interface     Possible values   other  added  removed    Table 290  Table in the Diagnostics Status Configuration MAC Notification  dialog    Buttons    Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings Load Save dialog and click  Save      Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device   Help Opens the online help     Table 291  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  298 Release 2 0 02 2013    Diagnostics 8 4 Status Configuration    8 4 5 Alarms  Traps     The device enables you to send an SNMP message  trap  yourself for  specific events to one or more SNMP managers    You define the events  for example  in the Diagnostics Status  Configuration Device Status dialog or the Diagnostics Status  Configuration Security Status dialog                    With this dialog you can define the SNMP managers to which the device  sends the traps     Operation  Parameters Meaning  Operation When the function is switched on  the device sends SNMP messages     traps  to the SNMP managers defined in the table   When the function is switched off  the device does not send any traps     Possible values   On  default setting   Of             Table 292  Operation  frame in the Diagnostics Status Configuration Alarms   Traps  dialog       Table  Par
50.  action if a port state occurs    LI Enable the port monitor globally    LI Enable the port monitor on a port    LI Configure the conditions on a port    LI Configure an action to perform on that port when the condition occurs     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 269    Diagnostics 8 3 Ports    The dialog contains the following tabs   Port Monitor  Global  Port Monitor  Link Flap  Port Monitor  CRC Fragments    8 3 5 Port Monitor  Global    In this dialog  you activate the configurations defined in the  Link Flap  and   CRC Fragments  tabs  The device also offers a Duplex Mismatch Detection  function  Duplex mismatch is a condition where 2 connected devices operate  at different duplex modes  either half or full duplex  The device detects these  conditions when you activate the functions and produces the user defined  action     Operation  Parameters Meaning  Operation Activates deactivates the Port Monitor function globally on the device     Possible values   On  off  default setting     Table 255   Operation  frame in the  Global  tab of the Diagnostics  Ports  Port  Monitor dialog    Table  Parameters Meaning  Port Shows the number of the device port to which the table entry relates     Table 256  Table in the  Global  tab of the Diagnostics  Ports Port Monitor dialog    RM GUI RSPS  270 Release 2 0 02 2013    Diagnostics    Parameters  Link Flap on    CRC Fragments on    Duplex Mismatch  Detection active    Active Condition    Action    Port Status    8 3 Ports    Meaning
51.  and ef  These values are compatible with the IP precedence model           In the QoS Priority IP DSCP Mapping dialog you assign the IP DSCP  value to the traffic classes and thus the data packets to a priority queue of  the port    Shows the number of priority queues per device port  Every priority queue  is assigned to traffic classes  traffic class based on IEEE 802 1D     The device supports 4 priority queues     Table 166   Configuration  frame in the QoS Priority Global dialog    190       RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    QoS Priority 6 1 Global    Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Help Opens the online help     Table 167  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 191    QoS Priority 6 2 Port Configuration    6 2 Port Configuration    In this dialog you define the QoS priority settings for each device port for  received data packets     Table    Parameters Meaning   Port Shows the number of the device port to which the table entry relates    Port Priority Defines the port priority   The device exchanges the data packets received on the port according to the  assigned traffic class     Possible values   0  7  default setting  0     Prerequisite    In the  Trust Mode  column you have selected
52.  continues     Note that any information and cryptographic algorithms used in this software  are publicly available on the Internet and at any major bookstore  scientific   library  and patent office worldwide  More information can be found e g  at    http   www cs hut fi crypto      The legal status of this program is some combination of all these permissions  and restrictions  Use only at your own responsibility  You will be responsible  for any legal consequences yourself    am not making any claims whether  possessing or using this is legal or not in your country  and   am not taking  any responsibility on your behalf  NO WARRANTY    BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE  THERE IS  NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM  TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY  APPLICABLE LAW  EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING  THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE  PROGRAM  AS IS  WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND  EITHER  EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED  INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED TO  THE  IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA  PARTICULAR PURPOSE  THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND  PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU  SHOULD THE  PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE  YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL  NECESSARY SERVICING  REPAIR OR CORRECTION     INNO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED  TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER  OR ANY OTHER  PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS  PERMITTED ABOVE  BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES  INCLUDING  ANY GENERAL  SPECIAL  
53.  description of the display  and the other information that you  need to install the device     The    Basic Configuration    user manual contains the information you need to  start operating the device  It takes you step by step from the first startup  operation through to the basic settings for operation in your environment     The    Redundancy Configuration    user manual document contains the  information you require to select the suitable redundancy procedure and  configure it     The    HiView    user manual contains information for using the HiView GUI  application  This application allows you to use the graphical user interface of  Hirschmann devices with management independently of other applications   such as a browser     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 9    About this Manual    The Industrial HiVision Network Management Software provides you with  additional options for smooth configuration and monitoring     10    Simultaneous configuration of multiple devices  Graphical user interface with network layout  Auto topology discovery   Event log   Event handling   Client server structure   Browser interface   ActiveX control for SCADA integration  SNMP OPC gateway     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Key    Key    The designations used in this manual have the following meanings     List  O Work step  Subheading  Link Cross reference with link  Note  A note emphasizes an important fact or draws your attention to a dependency     Courier ASCII representation in us
54.  detects 10 address conflicts one after the other  it extends  the waiting time until the next check to 60 s        When the address conflict has been resolved  the device  management returns to the network again    Passive   Passive address conflict detection  The device analyzes the data   traffic in the network  If another device in the network is using the   device   s own IP address  the device initially    defends    its IP address    The device stops sending if the other device then keeps sending with   the same IP address        Asa    defence    the device sends gratuituous ARP data packets   The device repeats this procedure for the number of times  specified in the  Number of Address Protections  field        If the other device continues sending with the same IP address   after the period specified in the  Release Delay  s   field  the  device periodically checks whether the address conflict still exists        When the address conflict has been resolved  the device  management returns to the network again        Table 16   Configuration  frame in the Basic Settings Network IP Address  Conflict Detection dialog    RM GUI RSPS  34 Release 2 0 02 2013    Basic Settings 1 2 Network    Parameters Meaning    Send Periodic ARP Switches the periodic address conflict detection on off     Probes    Possible values     On  default setting    The periodic address conflict detection is switched on        The device periodically sends an ARP probe data packet every 90  to 150 
55.  device deletes the  configuration profiles saved on the external memory  ENVM     After a brief period  the device restarts and loads the factory settings     Help Opens the online help        Table 29  Buttons  section  x3c  tblsheetnum gt  of 5     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 51    Basic Settings 1 5 External Memory    1 5 External Memory    This dialog allows you to activate functions that the device automatically  executes in combination with the external memory  ENVM   The dialog also  shows the operating state and identifying characteristics of the external  memory           Table  Parameters Meaning  Type Shows the type of the external memory   Possible values    SD  External SD memory  ACA31    Status Shows the operating status of the external memory    Possible values    notPresent  No external memory connected   removed  Someone has removed the external memory from the device during  operation   ok  The external memory is connected and ready for operation   outofMemory  The memory space is occupied on the external memory   genericErr  The device has detected an error    Writable Shows whether the device has write access to the external memory     Possible values   Selected  The device has write access to the external memory   Not selected  The device only has read access to the external memory  It is possible  that write protection is activated on the external memory     Manufacturer ID Shows the name of the memory manufacturer     Product Name Shows the produ
56.  device sends these  as events with the preset severity notice to the list of syslog servers   The preset minimum severity for a syslog server entry is critical     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    249    Diagnostics 8 2 Report    To send SNMP requests to a syslog server  you have a number of options  to change the default settings  Select the ones that meet your  requirements best     LI Set the severity for which the device creates SNMP requests as  events to warning or error and change the minimum severity for a  syslog entry for one or more syslog servers to the same value    You also have the option of creating a separate syslog server entry for  this     L Only set the severity for SNMP requests to critical or higher  The  device then sends SNMP requests as events with the severity  critical or higher to the syslog servers     LI Only set the minimum severity for one or more syslog server entries to  notice or lower  Then it may happen that the device sends a large  number of events to the syslog servers     CLI Logging    Parameters Meaning  Operation When the function is switched on  the device logs all commands received  through Command Line Interface  CLI      Possible values   On  off  default setting              Table 225  CLI Logging  frame in the Diagnostics Report Global dialog    Buttons    Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load S
57.  enables a port after an ARP Rate condition  produces a disable port action     Possible values   Selected  Enables the ports after the user defined time elapses   Not selected  default setting   The ports remain disabled     Table 262  Configuration  frame in the Diagnostics Ports Auto Disable dialog    Table    Parameters  Port  Reset Timers     Remaining Time  s   Component  Reason    Meaning  Shows the number of the device port to which the table entry relates     Timer value in seconds after which the device reactivates a deactivated  port     Possible values   30   4294967295  0  default setting   A value of 0 disables the timer     Remaining time in seconds until the reactivation of the port   Shows the name of the component that caused the port to disable itself   Shows the reason the port disabled itself     Table 263  Table in the Diagnostics  Ports Auto Disable dialog    276    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Diagnostics 8 3 Ports    Parameters Meaning  Active Shows the operational status of the function for the port     Possible values   Selected  The Auto Disable function shuts down the port   Not selected  default setting   The port is active     Table 263  Table in the Diagnostics Ports Auto Disable dialog  cont      Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the 
58.  entry   Propagate State Defines whether the device monitors the power supply     Possible values   Selected  default setting   The device changes the device status to Error if one of the following  conditions applies       The voltage source is providing an incorrect voltage       The voltage source fails       The power supply within the device is defective   Not selected  The device status remains unchanged under the conditions named  above        Table 273  Propagate State  table in the Diagnostics Status  Configuration Device Status dialog    Buttons    Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save      Table 274  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  284 Release 2 0 02 2013    Diagnostics 8 4 Status Configuration    Button Meaning   Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Help Opens the online help     Table 274  Buttons  cont      RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 285    Diagnostics 8 4 Status Configuration    8 4 2 Security Status    This dialog gives you an overview of the status of the safety relevant settings  in the device     The device displays its current status as    Error    or    OK    in the    Security  Status    frame  The device determines this status from the individual  monitoring results     The device displays the detected faults in the  Security Status  f
59.  groups  The protocol describes the  distribution of Multicast data packets between routers and terminal devices  on Layer 3     The device allows you to use the IGMP Snooping function to also use the  IGMP mechanisms on Layer 2   Without IGMP Snooping  the device transmits the Multicast data packets  to all the ports   With the activated IGMP Snooping function  the device transmits the  Multicast data packets exclusively on ports to which Multicast receivers  are connected  This reduces the network load  The device evaluates the  IGMP data packets transmitted on Layer 3 and uses the information on  Layer 2     L Activate the IGMP Snooping function not until the following conditions are  fulfilled       There is a Multicast router in the network that creates IGMP queries   periodic queries        The devices participating in IGMP Snooping forward the IGMP  queries     The device links the IGMP reports with the entries in its address table   forwarding database   If a Multicast receiver joins a Multicast group  report    the device creates a table entry in the Switching Filters for MAC  Addresses dialog for this port  If the Multicast receiver leaves the Multicast  group  the device removes the table entry again        The menu contains the following dialogs   Snooping  IGMP Snooping Enhancements  IGMP Querier  Multicasts    RM GUI RSPS  162 Release 2 0 02 2013    Switching 5 4 IGMP    5 4 1 Snooping    This dialog allows you to activate the IGMP Snooping protocol in the devic
60.  h  O       H        Possible values    2 147 483 648  2 147 483 647  default setting  35     Defines whether the value entered in the  UTC Offset  s   field is correct     Possible values    selected   not selected  default setting   Shows whether the device gets the time from a primary UTC reference   e g  from an NTP server     Possible values    selected   not selected  Shows whether the device gets the frequency from a primary UTC  reference  e g  from an NTP server     Possible values   selected  not selected    Shows whether the device uses the PTP time scale     Possible values   selected  not selected    According to IEEE 1588  the PTP time scale is the TAI atomic time started  on 01 01 1970    In contrast to UTC  TAI does not use leap seconds    On 01 01 2011  the difference between TAI and UTC was  34 seconds     Table 114   Local Time Properties  frame in the Time  PTP Boundary Clock Global    dialog    RM GUI RSPS    Release 2 0 02 2013    133    Time 3 3 PTP    Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Help Opens the online help     Table 115  Buttons    3 3 4 Boundary clock  Port    With this dialog you can define special settings for the Boundary Clock  BC   at every individual device port     
61.  in the  Snooping counters  Information  frame to 0   see the Switching  IGMP  Snooping dialog   Delete Log File Removes the logged events from the log file   see the    Diagnostics Report System Log dialog     Table 35  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 59    Basic Settings 1 7 Restart    Button Meaning   Delete Persistent Removes the log files from the external memory   see the  Log File Diagnostics Report Persistent Logging dialog    Help Opens the online help     Table 35  Buttons  cont      RM GUI RSPS  60 Release 2 0 02 2013    Security    2 Security    This menu allows you to define the settings for the access to the device     The menu contains the following dialogs   User Management  Authentication List  Management Access  Port Security  RADIUS  Pre login Banner    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    61    Security 2 1 User Management    2 1 User Management    The device allows users to access its management functions when they log  in with valid login data  The device authenticates the users either using the  local user management or with a RADIUS server in the network     In this dialog you manage the users of the local user management  You also  define the following settings here    Settings for the login   Settings for saving the passwords   Define policy for valid passwords    Configuration  This frame allows you to define settings for the login     Parameters Meaning  Number of Login Number of login attempts possible   Attempts    Possible values   0 
62.  interfaces 1 1 and 1 2 with interface hsr 1 as seen in the  Switching Rate Limiter and Switching Filter for MAC Addresses  dialogs  Configure interface hsr 1 for VLAN membership and Rate Limitation        RM GUI RSPS  216 Release 2 0 02 2013    Redundancy 7 3 HSR    Operation  Parameters Meaning  Operation Activates deactivates global HSR operation     Possible values   On  When activated  the device processes the traffic according to the  configured functions   Off  default setting              Table 194  Operation  frame in the Redundancy HSR  Configuration dialog    Port A Port B  Parameters Meaning  Port A The text box in this frame shows the port number that is operating as HSR    Port A on this device   The radio buttons activate deactivate the HSR function on port A     Possible values   On  default setting   OFT  Port B The text box in this frame shows the port number that is operating as HSR  Port B on this device              The radio buttons activate deactivate the HSR function on port B     Possible values   On  default setting   Of                Table 195   Port A   Port B  frames in the Redundancy HSR Configuration dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 217    Redundancy 7 3 HSR    Supervision Packet Receiver    Parameters Meaning   Evaluate Activates deactivates Supervision Packets analysis   Supervision   Packets Possible values     Selected  default setting    Supervision Packets analysis is switched on    The device receives Supervision Frames and ana
63.  into several smaller sequential    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 273    Diagnostics 8 3 Ports    packets before transmitting  The receiving device reassembles the packet in  the correct order  The device counts the packets which are less than 64 bytes  as fragments  When configured and activated  the device monitors both  conditions  If either the CRC or the Fragment count exceeds the configured  condition  the device performs the user defined action     Table  Parameters Meaning  Port Shows the number of the device port to which the table entry relates     Sampling Interval s  Defines the interval  in seconds  for CRC Fragment detection for this entry     Possible values   5  180  default setting  10   CRC Fragments Defines the CRC Fragment detection counter for this entry  When the  count  ppm  frequency of CRC Fragments reaches this number  the device produces  the action configured in the  Global  tab   Prerequisite for this function is that the  CRC Fragments on  function in  the  Global  tab is active     Possible values   1  1000000  default setting  1000     Last active Interval Shows the number of CRC Fragments that occurred during the last   ppm  interval     Total  ppm  Shows the total number of CRC Fragments that occurred since the last  reset     Table 260  Table in the  CRC Fragments  tab of the Diagnostics  Ports  Port  Monitor dialog       Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save 
64.  memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Help Opens the online help     Table 132  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 157    Switching    5 3 Filter for MAC addresses    5 3 Filter for MAC addresses    This dialog allows you to display and edit address filters for the address table   forwarding database   Address filters define the way the data packets are  forwarded in the device based on the destination MAC address     Each row in the table represents one filter  The device automatically sets up  the filters  The device allows you to set up additional filters manually     The device transmits the data packets as follows   If the table contains an entry for the destination address of a data packet   the device transmits the data packet from the receiving port to the port  specified in the table entry   If there is no table entry for the destination address  the device transmits  the data packet from the receiving port to all the other ports     Table    Parameters  Address  Status    Meaning  Shows the destination MAC address to which the table entry applies   Shows how the device has set up the address filter     Possible values     learned   Address filter set up automatically by the device based on received  data packets    permanent   Address filter set up manua
65.  off  default setting   The device transmits every received data packet without checking the  sender              Table 76   Operation  frame in the Security Port Security dialog    Table  Parameters Meaning  Port Shows the number of the device port to which the table entry relates   Active Activates deactivates the checking of the sender on the device port     Possible values   Selected  The device checks every data packet received on the device port and  transmits it if its sender is desired  You also switch on the function in  the  Operation  frame   Not selected  default setting   The device transmits every data packet received on the port without  checking the sender     Note  If you are operating the device as an active subscriber within an  MRP ring  we recommend setting the value of the field to Not selected     Table 77  Table in the Security Port Security dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 97    Security    Parameters  Violation Traps    Violation Trap  Frequency  s     Dynamic Limit    Static Limit    Current Dynamic    Current Static    Last Violating VLAN  ID MAC    Trapped Violations    2 4 Port Security    Meaning    Activates deactivates the sending of an SNMP message  trap  when the  device discards data packets from an undesired sender on the port     Possible values   Selected  The device sends an SNMP message when it discards data packets  from an undesired sender on the port   Not selected  default setting   The device does not send any SNMP messa
66.  packets whose  Size size exceeds the maximum allowed packet size     Possible values   Selected  The device detects and discards ingress ICMP data packets whose  size exceeds the allowed packet size  see the input field  Allowed  Packet Size     Not selected  default setting   The device forwards ingress ICMP data packets whose size is less  than the allowed packet size     Table 126  ICMP  frame in the Network Security DoS Global dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 149    Network Security 4 1 DoS    Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Help Opens the online help     Table 127  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  150 Release 2 0 02 2013    Switching    5 Switching    With this menu you can configure the settings for the switching     The menu contains the following dialogs   Global  Rate Limiter  Filter for MAC addresses  IGMP  VLAN    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 151    Switching 5 1 Global    5 1 Global    This dialog allows you to define the following settings   Change the aging time of the address table  forwarding database   Switch on the flow control in the device  Switch on the VLAN Unaware Mode    If many large data packets are received in the sending queue of a port  this  can cause the port memo
67.  phase  configure all the devices  individually  Before you connect the redundant line  be sure to complete the  configuration of all the devices     Failure to follow these instructions can result in death  serious injury   or equipment damage        The menu contains the following dialogs   Configuration  DAN VDAN Table  Proxy Node Table  Statistics    7 2 1 Configuration    With this dialog you switch the Parallel Redundancy Protocol function on off   and manage PRP supervision packet transmission and reception     MRP and STP cannot operate on the same ports as PRP  Deactivate or  choose different ports for MRP and deactivate STP on the PRP ports     Note  PRP uses interfaces 1 1 and 1 2 when active  The PRP function  replaces interfaces 1 1 and 1 2 with interface prp 1 as seen in the  VLAN     Rate Limiter   and  Filter for MAC Addresses  dialogs  Configure interface  prp 1 for VLAN membership  Rate Limitation  and MAC filtering     RM GUI RSPS  208 Release 2 0 02 2013    Redundancy    Operation    Parameters  Operation    7 2 PRP    Meaning  Activates deactivates global PRP operation     Possible values   On  When activated  the device processes the traffic according to the  configured functions   off  default setting              Note  To help avoid network loops  proceed as follows  Before you  deactivate the PRP operation globally  deactivate either Port A or Port B     Table 183   Operation  frame in the Redundancy  PRP  Configuration dialog    Port A Port B  Parame
68.  port is configured as Learn by LLDP    L   Learned   The device has detected the port as a query port because the port has  received IGMP queries in this VLAN  The port is not a statically  configured query port    ALA   Learn by LLDP  can be set    A user has configured the port as Learn by LLDP    With LLDP  Link Layer Discovery Protocol   the device detects  Hirschmann devices connected directly to the port  The device  denotes the detected query ports with A    You configure a port as Learn by LLDP by selecting the  Learn by  LLDP  checkbox on the  Configuration  page in the  Wizard     FA   Forward All  can be set    A user has configured the port so that the device transmits all the  received Multicast streams in the VLAN to this port  This setting is  suited to diagnostic purposes  for example    You configure the port as Forward A11 by selecting the  Forward All   checkbox on the  Configuration  page in the  Wizard     S   Static  can be set    A user has configured the port as a static query port  The device only  transmits IGMP reports to ports at which it previously received IGMP  queries     and to statically configured query ports    You configure the port as a static query port by selecting the  Static   checkbox in the  Configuration  step in the  Wizard      Table 142  Table in the Switching  IGMP Snooping Enhancements dialog    168    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Switching 5 4 IGMP    Parameters Meaning  Display Categories Simplifies the display  The 
69.  registered ports        Table 153  Table in the switching  IGMP Multicasts dialog  cont      Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Help Opens the online help     Table 154  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  176 Release 2 0 02 2013    Switching 5 5 VLAN    5 95 VLAN    With VLAN  Virtual Local Area Network  you distribute the data traffic in the  physical network to logical subnetworks  This provides you with the following  advantages    High flexibility       With VLAN you distribute the data traffic to logical networks in the  existing infrastructure  Without VLAN  it would be necessary to have  additional devices and complicated cabling        With VLAN you define network segments independently of the location  of the individual terminal devices    Improved throughput       In VLANs data packets can be transferred by priority    If the priority is high  the device transfers the data traffic of a VLAN  preferentially  e g  for time critical applications such as VoIP phone  Calls        The network load is considerably reduced if data packets and  Broadcasts are distributed in small network segments instead of in the  entire network    Increased security   The distribution of the data traffic among individual logic
70.  sake of clarity     If you use 1 port to connect several devices  for example via a hub  the  table contains 1 line for each connected device     Parameters Meaning  Port Shows the number of the device port to which the table entry relates     Neighbor Identifier Shows the chassis ID of the neighboring device  This can be the basis  MAC address of the neighboring device  for example     Neighbor IP Shows the IP address with which the management functions of the  Address neighboring device can be reached    Neighbor Port Shows a description for the device port of the neighboring device   Description   Neighbor System Shows the device name of the neighboring device    Name    Table 299  Table in the  LLDP  tab of the Diagnostics  LLDP Topology Discovery  dialog       RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 305    Diagnostics    Parameters  Port ID    Autonegotiation  Supported    Autonegotiation  Enabled    PoE Supported    PoE Enabled    8 5 LLDP    Meaning   Shows the ID of the device port through which the neighboring device is  connected to the device    Shows whether the device port of the neighboring device supports  autonegotiation    Shows whether autonegotiation is enabled on the device port of the  neighboring device    Shows whether the device port of the neighboring device supports Power  over Ethernet  PoE     Shows whether Power over Ethernet  PoE  is enabled on the device port  of the neighboring device     Table 299  Table in the  LLDP  tab of the Diagnostics LLDP Top
71.  server in the network     In this dialog you manage the authentication lists  In a list you define which  method the device uses for the authentication  Here you have the option to  differentiate the application with which the device is accessed  e g  viaa  console or with the graphical user interface     Table   Parameters Meaning   Name Shows the name of the list    To create a new list  you click  Create     Policy 1 Shows the authentication method that the device uses for access via the   Policy 2 application specified in the  Dedicated Applications  field  To change the   Policy 3 value  click the relevant field    Policy 4 A 5 A     Policy 5 The device gives you the option ofa fall back solution  For this  you  specify one other method in each of the  Policy 2  to  Policy 5  fields  If the  authentication with the specified method is not successful  the device uses  the next policy    Possible values   local  The device authenticates the users by using the local user  management   see the Security User Management dialog   radius  The device authenticates the users with a RADIUS server in the  network  You specify the RADIUS server in the  Security RADIUS Authentication Server dialog   reject  The device rejects the authentication request from the user    Dedicated Shows the dedicated applications  When users access the device with the   Applications relevant application  the device uses the defined policies for the  authentication     To allocate another application to
72.  set up  after  Max Age  the device sets the  device port to the forwarding state  default setting 20 s      Shows whether a terminal device or an STP bridge is connected to the  device port           Possible values   enable  A terminal device is connected to the device port  The device port  does not receive any STP BPDUs   disable  An STP bridge is connected to the device port  The device port  receives STP BPDUs     Shows whether the port is connected to an STP device via a direct full   duplex link     Possible values   true  The device port is connected directly to an STP device via a full   duplex link  The direct  decentralized communication between 2  bridges enables short reconfiguration times   false  The device port is connected in another way  e g  via a half duplex link  or via a hub        Table 212  CIST  tab page in the Redundancy  Spanning Tree Port dialog  section   x3c   tblsheetnum gt  of 4     234       RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Redundancy 7 4 Spanning Tree    Guards    On this tab page you can define the settings for various protection  functions on the device ports     Parameters Meaning  Port Shows the number of the device port to which the table entry relates   Root Guard Switches the monitoring of STP BPDUs on off on the device port  With this    setting the device helps you protect your network from incorrect  configurations or attacks with STP BPDUs that try to change the topology   This setting is only relevant for device ports with the
73.  that  the higher  a function appears at the top of the list  the higher the priority  When you  repair the displayed detected fault  the device displays the next higher  detected fault     Device Status    Parameters Meaning    Device Status Displays the current status of the device  The device determines the status  from the individual monitored parameters     Possible values   Error  OK       Table 269   Device Status  frame in the Diagnostics Status Configuration Device  Status dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 281    Diagnostics 8 4 Status Configuration    Trap Configuration    Parameters Meaning    Generate Trap Activates deactivates the sending of an SNMP message  trap  when the  value in the  Device Status  field changes     Possible values   Selected  The device sends a trap   Not selected  default setting   The device does not send a trap     The prerequisite for sending SNMP messages  traps  is that the function  is switched on in the Diagnostics Alarms  Traps  dialog and atleast 1  SNMP manager is defined     Table 270  Trap Configuration  frame in the Diagnostics Status  Configuration Device Status dialog    Monitoring  Parameters Meaning  Temperature Defines whether the device monitors the temperature in the device     Possible values    Ignore   The device ignores this parameter    Monitor  default setting    The device changes the device status to Error if the temperature  exceeds or falls below the temperature thresholds           You define the temp
74.  the  SNMP data packet header  Depending on the community name  the  application gets read authorization or read and write authorization for the  device     You activate the access to the device via SNMPv1 v2 in the  Security Management Access Server dialog     Table    Parameters Meaning    Community Shows the authorization for SNMPv1 v2 applications to the device   Write  For requests with the community name entered beside this  the  application gets read and write authorization for the device   Read  For requests with the community name entered here  the application  gets read authorization for the device     Name Defines the community name for the authorization entered beside it     Possible values   0  32 alphanumeric characters  including spaces and the following special characters   1    amp     4        lt   gt  2  M    private  default setting for read and write authorization   public  default setting for read authorization     Table 64  Table in the Security Management Access SNMPv1 v2 Community dialog     Buttons    Button Meaning    Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save      Table 65  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 87    Security 2 3 Management Access    Button Meaning   Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Help Opens the online help     Table 65  
75.  the  difference from the time information received   In Two Step mode the time information consists of 2 PTP synchronization  messages each  which the PTP master sends cyclically   The first synchronization message  sync message  contains an  estimated value for the exact sending time of the message   The second synchronization message  follow up message  contains  the exact sending time of the first message   The PTP slave uses the two PTP synchronization messages to calculate  the difference  offset  from the master and corrects its clock by this  difference  Here the PTP slave also considers the  Delay to Master  ns       Table 111   Status IEEE1588   PTPv2 BC  frame in the Time  PTP  Boundary  Clock Globa1 dialog    130    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Time 3 3 PTP    Parameters Meaning    Delay to Master  ns  Shows the delay when transmitting the PTP synchronization messages  from the PTP master to the PTP slave in nanoseconds   The PTP slave sends a    Delay Request    packet to the PTP master and  thus determines the exact sending time of the packet  When it receives the  packet  the PTP master generates a time stamp and sends this in a    Delay  Response    packet back to the PTP slave  The PTP slave uses the two  packets to calculate the delay  and considers this starting from the next  offset measurement   Prerequisite  The delay mechanism of the slave ports is set to the value  e2e     Table 111   Status IEEE1588   PTPv2 BC  frame in the Time  PTP  Boundary 
76.  the URL for the   file in one of the following forms        scp   orsftp    lt IP address gt   lt path gt   lt file name gt   When you click  Update   the device displays the  Authentication   dialog  There you enter the  User  and  Password  to login to the  server        scp   orsftp    lt user gt   lt password gt   lt IP  address gt   lt path gt   lt file name gt    Shows the  Open  dialog  If the image file is located on your PC or ona  network drive  you select the image file here    Updates the device software  In the process  the device copies the  selected file into the flash memory and replaces the device software  stored there    The device copies the existing  Stored Version  of the device software into  the backup area    The device loads the updated device software during the next restart                                Table 21   Software Update  frame in the Basic Settings Software dialog    38    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Basic Settings    Table    Parameters  File Location    Index   File name  Firmware  Applet  Logic    1 3 Software    Meaning  Shows the storage location of the device software     Possible values    RAM   Volatile memory of the device   FLASH   Non volatile memory  NVM  of the device   SD CARD   External SD memory  ACA31   Shows the index of the device software   Shows the device internal file name of the device software   Shows the version number and creation date of the device software   Shows the version number of the graphical 
77.  the list or remove the allocation  you  click  Allocate Applications   Every application can always be allocated to  exactly one list     Table 41  Table in the Security Authentication List dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 69    Security 2 2 Authentication List    Parameters Meaning  Active Activates deactivates the list   Possible values   Selected  The list is activated  The device uses the policies in this list when  users access the device with the relevant application     Not selected  The list is deactivated     Table 41  Table in the Security Authentication List dialog  cont      Note  If the table does not contain a list  it is only possible to access the  device using CLI via the V 24 interface  In this case  the device  authenticates the user by using the local user management   see the  Security User Management dialog     New Entry    In this frame you set up a new authentication list  To display the frame   you click the  Create  button     Parameters Meaning  Name Specifies the name of the list     Possible values   1  32 alphanumeric characters    Policy 1 Specifies the authentication method that the device uses   Policy 2           The device gives you the option of a fall back solution  For this  you  Policy 3      Dal  Wan  Dal   f  Policy 4 specify one other method in each of the  Policy 2  to  Policy 5  fields   Policy 5 Possible values     local   The device authenticates the users by using the local user  management   see the Security User Mana
78.  the value as follows   untrusted   or  trustDotlp   The data packets do not contain a VLAN tag or priority tag   or  trustIpDscp   The data packets are not IP packets                    The QoS Priority 802 1D p Mapping dialog shows which traffic class has been  assigned to the respective VLAN priority  The device assigns the data packets  to a traffic class depending on their VLAN priority and thereby sorts them in the  priority queue     Table 168  Table in the QoS Priority Port Configuration dialog    RM GUI RSPS  192 Release 2 0 02 2013    QoS Priority    Parameters  Trust Mode    Untrusted  Traffic Class    6 2 Port Configuration    Meaning    Defines how the device handles received data packets that contain  QoS priority information     Possible values   untrusted  The device ignores the QoS priority information contained in the data  packets and prioritizes them according to the value entered in the  Port  Priority  column   trustDot1p  default setting       Data packets with a VLAN tag are prioritized by the device according  to the QoS priority information contained in the data packet   The QoS Priority 802 1D p Mapping dialog shows the traffic class to  which the respective VLAN priority is assigned  The device assigns the  data packets to a traffic class depending on their VLAN priority and  thereby sorts them in the priority queue       Data packets without a VLAN tag are prioritized by the device  according to the value defined in the  Port Priority  column   tr
79.  them to all ports  or transmits them only to the ports that previously received  query packets     The device also allows you to transmit the data packets with known Multicast  addresses to the query ports     Configuration    Parameters Meaning    Unknown Multicasts Defines how the device transmits the data packets with unknown Multicast  addresses     Possible values   Send to Query Ports  The device sends data packets with an unknown MAC IP Multicast  address to the query ports   Send To All Ports  default setting   The device sends data packets with an unknown MAC IP Multicast  address to the ports   Discard  The device discards data packets with an unknown MAC IP Multicast  address     Table 152  Configuration  frame in the switching  IGMP Multicasts dialog    Table    In the table you define the settings for known Multicasts for the VLANs  that are set up     Parameters Meaning  VLAN ID Shows the ID of the VLAN to which the table entry applies     Table 153  Table in the switching  IGMP Multicasts dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 175    Switching 5 4 IGMP    Parameters Meaning  Known Multicasts Defines how the device transmits the data packets with known Multicast  addresses     Possible values   Send to query and registered ports  The device sends data packets with an unknown MAC IP Multicast  address to query ports and to registered ports   Send to registered Ports  default setting   The device sends data packets with an unknown MAC IP Multicast  address to
80.  tjh cryptsoft com            Original SSLeay License       Copyright  C  1995 1998 Eric Young  eay cryptsoft com     All rights reserved       This package is an SSL implementation written    by Eric Young  eay cryptsoft com      The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL       This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as    the following conditions are aheared to  The following conditions     apply to all code found in this distribution  be it the RC4  RSA     lhash  DES  etc   code  not just the SSL code  The SSL documentation    included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms     except that the holder is Tim Hudson  t h cryptsoft com        Copyright remains Eric Young s  and as such any Copyright notices in     the code are not to be removed      If this package is used in a product  Eric Young should be given attribution    as the author of the parts of the library used      This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or     in documentation  online or textual  provided with the package          RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 335    Appendix A 8 Copyright of Integrated Software      Redistribution and use in source and binary forms  with or without     modification  are permitted provided that the following conditions     are met      1  Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright     notice  this list of conditions and the following disclaimer      2  Redistribut
81.  to process HSR traffic for PRP Network 7 LAN B        Table 198  HSR Parameter  frame in the Redundancy  HSR Configuration dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 219    Redundancy 7 3 HSR    Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Help Opens the online help     Table 199  Buttons    7 3 2 DAN VDAN Table    This dialog helps to analyze the LANs  For example  when the  Last Seen       counter of 1 port continually increases while the other remains the same  This  condition indicates a loss of LAN connection     Table   Parameters Meaning   Index Shows a sequential number for the node to which the table entry refers   The device automatically defines this number    MAC Address Shows the MAC address of the node    Last Seen A Shows the time between received first packets for this node on LAN A   When the counter threshold reaches 497 days  it restarts from 0    Last Seen B Shows the time between received first packets for this node on LAN B     When the counter threshold reaches 497 days  it restarts from 0   Remote Node Type Shows the type of node     Possible values   RedBoxh  Management  vdanh  Client       Table 200  Table in the Redundancy HSR DAN VDAN Table dialog    RM GUI RSPS  220 Release 2 0 02 20
82.  vendor specific hardware revision string as advertised by the  remote endpoint           Table 301  Table in the  LLDP MED  tab of the Diagnostics  LLDP  Topology  Discovery dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    307    Diagnostics    Parameters  Firmware Revision    Software Revision  Serial Number  Manufacturer Name  Model Name    Asset ID    8 5 LLDP    Meaning   Shows the vendor specific firmware revision string as advertised by the  remote endpoint    Shows the vendor specific software revision string as advertised by the  remote endpoint    Shows the vendor specific serial number as advertised by the remote  endpoint    Shows the vendor specific manufacturer name as advertised by the  remote endpoint    Shows the vendor specific model name as advertised by the remote  endpoint    Shows the vendor specific asset tracking identifier as advertised by the  remote endpoint     Table 301  Table in the  LLDP MED  tab of the Diagnostics  LLDP  Topology  Discovery dialog  cont      Buttons    Button  Reload    Help    Table 302  Buttons    308    Meaning    Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device     Opens the online help     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Advanced    9 Advanced    With this menu you can configure additional settings for the device     The menu contains the following dialogs   Telnet Client    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 309    Advanced 9 1 Telnet Client    9 1 Telnet Client    This dialog o
83.  you to perform remote diagnosis  The device uses the relay contact to signal  the occurrence of events by opening the relay contact and interrupting the    closed circuit     In this dialog you define the trigger conditions for the signal contact     The signal contact gives you the following options   Monitoring the correct operation of the device   Signaling the device status of the device   Signaling the security status of the device   Controlling external devices by manually setting the signal contacts     RM GUI RSPS    Release 2 0 02 2013    291    Diagnostics 8 4 Status Configuration    Signal Contact Mode    Parameters Meaning  Signal Contact Specifies which events the device signals via the signal contact   Mode    Possible values   Monitoring Correct Operation  default setting   In this mode the signal contact signals events that occur when  monitoring individual device functions  The signal contact thus makes  remote diagnosis possible   In the  Monitoring Correct Operation  frame  you define additional  settings   Manual Setting  With this mode you can control the signal contact remotely   In the  Manual Setting  frame  you define additional settings   Device Status  In this mode the signal contact signals the overall status from the   Device Status  dialog   The  Status  frame shows the status   Security Status  In this mode the signal contact signals the overall status from the   Security Status  dialog   The  Status  frame shows the status   Device Status Secu
84. 02 1Q 2005  the Spanning Tree function is effective in  all the configured VLANs     Table 207  Protocol Version  frame in the Redundancy  Spanning Tree Global  dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 225    Redundancy 7 4 Spanning Tree    Protocol Configuration   Information    Parameters Meaning    Bridge ID Shows the bridge ID of the device   The device with the numerically lowest bridge ID takes over the role of  the root bridge in the network     Possible values    lt Bridge priority gt     lt MAC address gt     Priority Defines the bridge priority of the device     Possible values   0  61440 in steps of 4096  default setting  32  768     Assign the numerically lowest priority in the network to the device to  make it the root bridge    Hello Time  s  Defines the time in seconds between the sending of two configuration  messages  Hello data packets      Possible values   1  2  default setting  2     If the device takes over the role of the root bridge  the other devices in  the network use the value defined here    Otherwise the device uses the value specified by the root bridge   see  the  Root  column     Due to the interaction with the  Tx Hold Count  parameter  we  recommend not changing the default setting     Forward Delay  s  Defines the delay time for the status change in seconds     Possible values   4   30  default setting  15     If the device takes over the role of the root bridge  the other devices in  the network use the value defined here    Otherwise th
85. 13    Redundancy 7 3 HSR    Buttons  Button Meaning  Delete Deletes the entire table   Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device   Help Opens the online help     Table 201  Buttons    7 3 3 Proxy Node Table    This dialog informs you of the connected devices for which this device  provides HSR redundancy     Table  Parameters Meaning  Index Shows a sequential number to which the table entry relates   The device automatically defines this number   Possible values   0  128  MAC Address Shows the MAC addresses of the connected devices for which this device    implements HSR redundancy     Table 202  Table in the Redundancy HSR  Proxy Node Table dialog    Buttons  Button Meaning  Delete Deletes the entire table     Table 203  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 221    Redundancy 7 3 HSR    Button Meaning   Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Help Opens the online help     Table 203  Buttons  cont      7 3 4 Statistics    This dialog lists receive events for various MIB Managed Objects  Each entry  represents link degradation for the MIB Managed Objects listed in the  description column  The table lists how often the event occurred for each  path through the device  The Port A entries for example  specify the path  between the transceiver  through the Link Redundancy Entity  LRE  to the  UDP and TCP layers     Table   Parameters Meaning   Descripti
86. 13    Switching 5 1 Global  Configuration   Parameters Meaning   MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the device     Aging Time  s     Activate Flow  Control    Defines the aging time in seconds     Possible values    10  500000  default setting  30   The device monitors the age of the learned Unicast MAC addresses   Address entries that exceed a particular age  aging time  are deleted by the  device from its address table  FBD  Forwarding Database    You will find the address table in the Switching Filter for MAC addresses  dialog     In connection with the router redundancy  select a time 2 30 s   Activates deactivates the flow control globally in the device     Possible values   Not selected  default setting   Selected  For this  you also activate the  Flow Control  function for the device  ports in the Basic Settings Port Configuration dialog     When you are using a redundancy function  you deactivate the flow control  on the participating ports  If the flow control and the redundancy function are  active at the same time  there is a risk that the redundancy function will not  operate as intended        Table 128  Configuration  frame in the switching Global dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    153    Switching 5 1 Global    Parameters Meaning  VLAN Unaware Defines the bridging mode of the device   Mode    Possible values    Not selected  default setting    The device works in the VLAN Aware bridging mode  802 1Q         The device evaluates the VLAN tags in 
87. 191  Buttons  cont      7 2 4 Statistics    This dialog lists receive events for various MIB Managed Objects  Each entry  represents link degradation for the MIB Managed Objects listed in the  description column  The table lists how often the event occurred for each  path through the device  The Port A entries for example  specify the path  between the transceiver  through the Link Redundancy Entity  LRE  to the  UDP and TCP layers     Table   Parameters Meaning   Description Shows the MIB Managed Objects description to which the Port and  Interlink entries refer    Port A Shows the number of MIB Managed Objects events on port A  The device  examines the traffic as it passes from receive transceiver A to the LRE    Port B Shows the number of MIB Managed Objects events on port B  The device  examines the traffic as it passes from receive transceiver B to the LRE    Interlink Shows the number of MIB Managed Objects events on the interlink  The    counters are active for the MIB Managed Objects that pertain to the  interlink  The other counters remain empty  A sample is made of the traffic  as it passes from the LRE to the switch    CPU Port Shows the number of MIB Managed Objects events on the CPU Port   There is one MIB Managed Object that pertains to the CPU Port  The other  counters remain empty  A sample is made of the traffic as it passes from  receive transceiver to the CPU     Table 192  Table in the Redundancy  PRP  Statistics dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 
88. 2 0 02 2013    Security 2 3 Management Access    2 3 Management Access    This dialog allows you to set up the server services with which users or  applications can access the management functions of the device  You also  have the option of restricting the access for IP address ranges and individual  management services     The menu contains the following dialogs   Server  SNMPv1 v2 Community  IP Access Restriction  Web  CLI    2 3 1 Server    This dialog allows you to set up the server services with which users or  applications can access the management functions of the device     The dialog contains the following tabs   Server  SNMP  Server  Telnet  Server  HTTP  Server  HTTPS  Server  SSH    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 73    Security    2 3 Management Access    2 3 2 Server  SNMP    This tab allows you to define settings for the SNMP server of the device and  to switch on off the access to the device with different SNMP versions     The SNMP server enables access to the management functions of the  device with SNMP based applications  e g  with the graphical user interface     Configuration    Parameters  SNMPv1 enabled    SNMPv2 enabled    SNMPv3 enabled    Meaning  Activates deactivates the access to the device with SNMP version 1     Possible values   Selected  default setting   Access activated   Not selected  Access deactivated     You define the community name in the Security Management  Access SNMPv1 v2 Community dialog     Activates deactivates the access to t
89. 213    Redundancy 7 2 PRP    Buttons  Button Meaning  Delete Deletes the entire table   Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device   Help Opens the online help     Table 193  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  214 Release 2 0 02 2013    Redundancy 7 3 HSR    7 3 HSR    As with PRP  a High availability Seamless Redundancy  HSR  ring also  offers zero recovery time  HSR is suited for applications that demand high  availability and short reaction times  For example  protection applications for  electrical station automation and controllers for synchronized drives which  require constant connection     HSR Redundancy Boxes  RedBox  use 2 Ethernet ports operating in parallel  to connect to a ring  An HSR RedBox operating in this configuration is a  Doubly Attached Node implementing the HSR protocol  DANH   A standard  ethernet device connected to the HSR ring through an HSR RedBox is a  Virtual DANH  VDANH      As with PRP  the transmitting HSR node or HSR RedBox sends twin frames   1 in each direction  on the ring  For identification  the HSR node injects the  twin frames with an HSR tag  The HSR tag consists of a port identifier  the  length of the payload and a sequence number  In anormal operating ring  the  destination HSR node or RedBox receives both frames within a certain time  skew  An HSR node forwards the first frame to arrive to the upper layers and  discards the second frame when it arrives  A RedBox on the other hand  fo
90. 64 alphanumeric characters   including the following special characters    1     amp            lt   gt   MP p   The minimum length of the password is defined in the  Password Policy   frame  The device differentiates between upper and lower case     When the checkbox in the  Policy Check  field is selected  the device  checks the password according to the policy defined in the  Password  Policy  frame     The device always checks the minimum length of the password  even if  the checkbox in the  Policy Check  field is not selected     Table 38  Table in the security User Management dialog  section    64     x3c  tblsheetnum gt  of 3     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Security    Parameters  Access Role    User locked    Policy Check    SNMP Auth Type    2 1 User Management    Meaning    Defines the access role that regulates the user   s access to the individual  functions of the device     Possible values   guest  The user is authorized to monitor the device   operator  The user is authorized to monitor and configure the device   with the  exception of security settings for the access to the device   administrator  The user is authorized to monitor and configure the device   unauthorized  The user is locked  and the device rejects the user   s login   You assign this value to temporarily lock the user account  If an error  occurs when another access role is being assigned  the device  assigns this access role to the user account     Locks unlocks the user   s access to 
91. AC address of the device  The device management can be  accessed via the network using the MAC address     Table 8   Management Interface  frame in the Basic Settings Network Global  dialog    RM GUI RSPS  28 Release 2 0 02 2013    Basic Settings 1 2 Network    HiDiscovery Protocol    This frame allows you to define settings for the access to the device using  the HiDiscovery protocol     On aPC the HiDiscovery software shows you the Hirschmann devices in  the network that can be accessed on which the HiDiscovery function is  switched on  You can access these devices even if they have invalid IP  parameters or none at all  The HiDiscovery software allows you to change  the IP parameters in the device     Parameters Meaning  Operation Activates deactivates the HiDiscovery function in the device     Possible values    On  default setting    HiDiscovery is activated    You can use the HiDiscovery software to access the device from your  PC     Off  HiDiscovery is deactivated     Access Activates deactivates the write access to the device using HiDiscovery              Possible values   readWrite  default setting   The HiDiscovery software is given write access to the device   With this setting you can change the IP parameters in the device   readOnly  The HiDiscovery software is given only read access to the device   With this setting you can view the IP parameters in the device     Recommendation  Only change the setting to readOn1y after putting the  device into operation     
92. AN Unaware mode is switched off if one of the  following situations occurs    The port receives data packets without a VLAN tagging    The port receives data packets with VLAN priority information  VLAN   ID 0  priority tagged     The VLAN tagging of the data packet differs from the VLAN ID of the port     Note  The VLAN settings are only effective if the VLAN Unaware Mode is  switched off   see the Switching Global dialog        Table  Parameters Meaning  Port Shows the number of the device port to which the table entry relates     Table 161  Switching  VLAN  Port dialog       RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 183    Switching    Parameters  Port VLAN ID    Acceptable  Frame Types    Ingress Filtering    5 5 VLAN    Meaning   The port assigns to this VLAN data packets that have no VLAN tag   This setting is effective if you have selected the value  admitAll  in the  Acceptable Frame Types column     Possible values    All VLAN IDs that are set up  default setting  1   Defines whether the port transmits or discards received data packets without  a VLAN tag     Possible values   admitAl11  default setting   The port accepts data packets both with and without a VLAN tag   admitOnlyVlanTagged  The port only accepts data packets tagged with a VLAN ID 2 1     Defines whether the port transmits or discards received data packets with a  VLAN tagging           Possible values   selected  The device compares the VLAN tagging in the data packet with the  VLANs to which the device sends 
93. Buttons  cont      2 3 8 IP Access Restriction    This dialog enables you to restrict the access to the management functions  of the device to specific IP address ranges and selected IP based  applications   If the function is switched off  you can access the management functions  of the device from any IP address and via all applications   If the function is switched on  the access is restricted  You can only  access the management functions under the following conditions       Atleast one table entry is activated   and      You are accessing the device with a permitted application from a  permitted IP address range     Operation  Parameters Meaning  Operation If the function is switched on  the access to the management functions of    the device is restricted     Possible values    off  default setting     On   Access to the management functions of the device is restricted              Table 66   Operation  frame in the Securi ty Management Access IP Access  Restriction dialog    RM GUI RSPS  88 Release 2 0 02 2013    Security 2 3 Management Access    Note  Before switching on the function  make sure that at least one active  entry in the table allows you access  Otherwise the connection to the  device terminates when you change the device configuration  It is then  only possible to access the management functions using CLI via the V 24  interface of the device     Table    You have the option of defining up to 16 table entries and activating them  separately     Parameters
94. CONTRIBUTORS    AS IS  AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED     WARRANTIES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED TO  THE IMPLIED     WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA     PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE    REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT      INDIRECT  INCIDENTAL  SPECIAL  EXEMPLARY  OR     CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED TO      PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES  LOSS OF     USE  DATA  OR PROFITS  OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION      HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY  WHETHER    IN CONTRACT  STRICT LIABILITY  OR TORT  INCLUDING     NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE  ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE     USE OF THIS SOFTWARE  EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF    SUCH DAMAGE     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 331    Appendix A 8 Copyright of Integrated Software    Some code is licensed under an ISC style license  to the following copyright  holders     Internet Software Consortium   Todd C  Miller   Reyk Floeter   Chad Mynhier      Permission to use  copy  modify  and distribute this software for any     purpose with or without fee is hereby granted  provided that the above     copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies       THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED  AS IS  AND TODD C  MILLER     DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE     INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND    FITNESS  INNO EVENT SHALL TODD C  MILLER BE LIABLE FOR ANY    SPECIAL  DIRECT  INDIRECT  OR CONSEQUENT
95. Command Line Interface    reference manual     The dialog contains the following tabs     CLI  Global    CLI Login Banner    92    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Security 2 3 Management Access    2 3 11 CLI  Global    This tab allows you to change the CLI prompt and to define the automatic  closing of sessions via the V 24 interface when they have been inactive     Configuration  Parameters Meaning  Login Prompt Defines the character string that the device displays in the Command Line    Interface  CLI  at the start of every command line     Possible values   0  32 alphanumeric characters  Default setting   RSPS   including spaces and the following special characters   1    amp     4       lt   gt   M       Changes to this setting are immediately effective in the active CLI session     V 24 Timeout  min  Defines the time in minutes after which the device automatically closes the  session of a logged on user in the Command Line Interface via the V 24  interface when it has been inactive     Possible values   0   160  default setting  5     The value 0 deactivates the function  and the user remains logged on  when inactive     For Telnet and SSH  you define the timeout in the Security Management    Access  Server dialog     Table 71   Configuration  frame in the Security Management Access CLI dialog    Global  tab page    Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open th
96. Configuration Security  Status dialog  section  x3c  tblsheetnum gt  of 4        Monitor active Port without link    table    Parameters  Port    Monitor active Port  without link    Meaning  Shows the number of the device port to which the table entry relates   Defines whether the device monitors the link status of an enabled port     Possible values   Selected  The device changes the security status to Error if the port is switched  on  dialog Basic Settings Port Configuration  checkbox  Port on   is selected  and the link is down on the port   Not selected  default setting   The security status remains unchanged if someone sets up a  connection via the port        This setting only takes effect if you have selected the value Monitor in  the  Monitoring  frame in the  Active Port without link  field     Table 278   Monitor active Port without link  table in the Diagnostics Status  Configuration Security Status dialog    290    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Diagnostics    Buttons    Button  Set    Reload    Help    Table 279  Buttons    8 4 Status Configuration    Meaning   Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Opens the online help     8 4 3 Signal Contact    The signal contact is a potential free relay contact  The device thus allows 
97. DAN Activates deactivates the transmission of VDAN Supervision Packets   Packets Prerequisite is that you first activate the  Supervision Packet Transmitter      Possible values   Selected  default setting   Transmission of VDAN Supervision Packets is activated   In addition to transmitting its own Supervision Packets  the RedBox  transmits Supervision Packets for the VDANs listed in the  Proxy  Node Table    Not selected  Transmission of VDAN Supervision Packets is deactivated     Table 186   Supervision Packet Transmitter  frame in the  Redundancy  PRP Configuration dialog    RM GUI RSPS  210 Release 2 0 02 2013    Redundancy    Buttons    Button  Set    Reload    Help    Table 187  Buttons    7 2 PRP    Meaning   Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Opens the online help     7 2 2 DAN VDAN Table    This dialog helps to analyze the LANs  For example  when the  Last Seen       counter of 1 port continually increases while the other remains the same  This  condition indicates a loss of LAN connection     Table    Parameters  Index    MAC Address  Last Seen A    Last Seen B    Remote Node Type    Meaning   Shows a sequential number for the node to which the table entry refers   The device automatically defines this number    Shows the MAC addr
98. External SD memory  ACA31      State Shows the operating state of the external memory     Possible values   notPresent  No external memory connected   removed  Someone has removed the external memory from the device during  operation   ok  The external memory is connected and ready for operation   outofMemory  The memory space is occupied on the external memory   genericErr  The device has detected an error        Table 24   External Memory  frame in the Basic Settings Load Save dialog    RM GUI RSPS  40 Release 2 0 02 2013    Basic Settings 1 4 Load Save    Configuration encryption    Parameters Meaning  Active Shows whether the configuration encryption is switched on in the device     Possible values   Not selected  The configuration encryption is switched off   The device loads a configuration from the non volatile memory  NVM   only if it is unencrypted   Selected  The configuration encryption is switched on   The device loads a configuration from the non volatile memory  NVM   only if it is encrypted and the password matches the password stored  in the device     If the  Config Priority  field has the value first  second or third and  the configuration profile is unencrypted  the  Security Status  frame in the  Basic Settings System dialog shows an alarm  In the  Monitoring  frame  in the Diagnostics Status Configuration Security Status dialog  you  specify whether the device monitors the parameter  Config load from  external NVM unsecure         Table 25   Configuration
99. Help Opens the online help     Table 33  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  58 Release 2 0 02 2013    Basic Settings 1 7 Restart    1   Restart    This dialog allows you to restart the device  reset port counters and address  tables  and delete log files     Restart  Button Meaning  Cold start    Triggers a restart of the device     After the start  the device goes through the following phases   The device performs a RAM test if this function is switched on in the  Diagnostics System Selftest dialog   The device starts the  Stored Version  of the device software   see the  Basic Settings Software dialog   The device loads the settings of the configuration profile designated  as  Selected    see the Basic Settings Load Save dialog     Note  During the restart  the device does not transfer any data  During this  time  the device cannot be accessed by the graphical user interface or  other management systems     Table 34   Restart  frame in the Basic Settings Restart dialog    Buttons  Button Meaning  Reset MAC Removes the MAC addresses designated with the learned setup status  Address Table from the forwarding table   see the Switching Filter for MAC Addresses    table   Reset ARP Table Removes the dynamically set up addresses from the ARP table   see the  Basic Settings Network ARP Table dialog     Reset port counters Resets the counter for the port statistics to 0   see the  Diagnostics Ports Statistics Table dialog     Reset IGMP Removes the IGMP Snooping entries and resets the counter
100. IAL DAMAGES OR     ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE      DATA OR PROFITS  WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT      NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION  ARISING OUT OF ORIN    CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS     SOFTWARE     Some code is licensed under a MIT style license to the following copyright  holders     Free Software Foundation  Inc       Permission is hereby granted  free of charge  to any person obtaining a    copy of this software and associated documentation files  the    Software    to deal in the Software without restriction  including     without limitation the rights to use  copy  modify  merge  publish      distribute  distribute with modifications  sublicense  and or sell     copies of the Software  and to permit persons to whom the Software is    furnished to do so  subject to the following conditions       The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included    in all copies or substantial portions of the Software       THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED  AS IS   WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY    KIND  EXPRESS OR IMPLIED  INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE    WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY  FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR    PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT     RM GUI RSPS  332 Release 2 0 02 2013    Appendix A 8 Copyright of Integrated Software      IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE    FOR ANY CLAIM  DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY  WHETHER IN AN    ACTION OF CONTRACT  TORT OR OTHERWISE  ARISING FROM  OUT    OF OR IN CONNEC
101. IMITED TO     PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES  LOSS     OF USE  DATA  OR PROFITS  OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION      HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY      WHETHER IN CONTRACT  STRICT LIABILITY  OR TORT      INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE  ARISING IN ANY WAY    OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE  EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE    POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE     RM GUI RSPS  328 Release 2 0 02 2013    Appendix A 8 Copyright of Integrated Software    6     Remaining components of the software are provided under a standard  2 term BSD licence with the following names as copyright holders     Markus Friedl  Theo de Raadt  Niels Provos  Dug Song  Aaron Campbell  Damien Miller  Kevin Steves  Daniel Kouril  Wesley Griffin  Per Allansson  Nils Nordman  Simon Wilkinson    Portable OpenSSH additionally includes code from the following copyright  holders  also under the 2 term BSD license     Ben Lindstrom  Tim Rice   Andre Lucas  Chris Adams  Corinna Vinschen  Cray Inc    Denis Parker  Gert Doering  Jakob Schlyter  Jason Downs  Juha Yrjola  Michael Stone  Networks Associates Technology  Inc   Solar Designer  Todd C  Miller  Wayne Schroeder  William Jones  Darren Tucker  Sun Microsystems  The SCO Group  Daniel Walsh   Red Hat  Inc    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 329    Appendix A 8 Copyright of Integrated Software      Redistribution and use in source and binary forms  with or without     modification  are permitted provided that the following conditions     are met      1
102. INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL  DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE  PROGRAM  INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA  BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR  THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH  ANY OTHER PROGRAMS   EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY  HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 325    Appendix A 8 Copyright of Integrated Software    2     The 32 bit CRC compensation attack detector in deattack c was contributed  by CORE SDI S A  under a BSD style license       Cryptographic attack detector for ssh   source code    Copyright  c  1998 CORE SDI S A   Buenos Aires  Argentina       All rights reserved  Redistribution and use in source and binary    forms  with or without modification  are permitted provided that    this copyright notice is retained       THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED    AS IS  AND ANY EXPRESS OR    IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE DISCLAIMED  IN NO EVENT SHALL    CORE SDI S A  BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT  INDIRECT      INCIDENTAL  SPECIAL  EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL     DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OR MISUSE OF THIS     SOFTWARE       Ariel Futoransky  lt futo core sdi com gt        lt http   www core sdi com gt     3   ssh keyscan was contributed by David Mazieres under a BSD style license       Copyright 1995  1996 by David Mazieres  lt dm lcs mit edu gt        Modification and redistribution in source and binary forms is    permitted provided that du
103. ITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS  IN NO  EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE  FOR ANY CLAIM  DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY  WHETHER IN AN  ACTION OF CONTRACT  TORT OR OTHERWISE  ARISING FROM  OUT  OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR  OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE     Except as contained in this notice  the name of a copyright holder shall not  be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale  use or other dealings  in this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder     RM GUI RSPS  322 Release 2 0 02 2013    Appendix A 8 Copyright of Integrated Software    A 8 4 libssh2    Copyright  c  2004 2007 Sara Golemon  lt sarag libssh2 org gt   Copyright  c  2005 2006 Mikhail Gusarov  lt dottedmag dottedmag net gt   Copyright  c  2006 2007 The Written Word  Inc   Copyright  c  2007 Eli Fant  lt elifantu mail ru gt    Copyright  c  2009 Daniel Stenberg   Copyright  C  2008  2009 Simon Josefsson   All rights reserved     Redistribution and use in source and binary forms  with or without  modification  are permitted provided that the following conditions are met     Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice  this  list of conditions and the following disclaimer     Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice   this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or  other materials provided with the d
104. M GUI RSPS    UDP   TFTP   IP   ICMP   TCP   ARP   Telnet   Telnet Option   BOOTP   IGMPv1   SNMPv1   SMlv1   Concise MIB Definitions   MIB2   Dotid   BOOTP Extensions   Ethernet like  MIB   RMON   Form Based File Upload in HTML  Community based SNMP v2  Protocol Operations for SNMP v2  Transport Mappings for SNMP v2  HTTP 1 0   HTTP 1 1 protocol as updated by draft ietf http v11 spec rev 03  DHCP   DHCP Options   The Interfaces Group MIB using SMI v2  IGMPv2   The TLS Protocol  Version 1 0   AES Ciphersuites for Transport Layer Security  Administratively Scoped IP Multicast    Definition of the Differentiated Services Field  DS Field  in the IPv4 and IPv6  Headers    An Architecture for Differentiated Service  SMlv2   Textual Conventions for SMI v2  Conformance statements for SMI v2  SMON   RADIUS Authentication Client MIB    Release 2 0 02 2013 313    Appendix    RFC 2620  RFC 2674  RFC 2818  RFC 2851  RFC 2863  RFC 2865  RFC 2866  RFC 2868  RFC 2869    RFC 2869bis    RFC 2933  RFC 3164  RFC 3376  RFC 3410    RFC 3411  RFC 3412    RFC 3413  RFC 3414    RFC 3415  RFC 3418    RFC 3580  RFC 3584    RFC 4022  RFC 4113  RFC 4188  RFC 4251  RFC 4252  RFC 4253  RFC 4254  RFC 4293  RFC 4318  RFC 4330  RFC 4363    RFC 4541    RFC 4836    314    A 2 List of RFCs    RADIUS Accounting MIB  Dot1p Q   HTTP over TLS   Internet Addresses MIB  The Interfaces Group MIB  RADIUS Client   RADIUS Accounting  RADIUS Attributes for Tunnel Protocol Support  RADIUS Extensions  RADIUS support for EAP
105. M GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    177  177  179  179  179  183  178  152    40    40  44    251    341    Readers    Comments    C Readers    Comments    What is your opinion of this manual  We are constantly striving to provide as  comprehensive a description of our product as possible  as well as important  information to assist you in the operation of this product  Your comments and  suggestions help us to further improve the quality of our documentation     Your assessment of this manual     Very Good Satisfactory Mediocre Poor   Good  Precise description O O O O O  Readability O O O O O  Understandability O O O O O  Examples O O O O O  Structure O O O O O  Comprehensive O O O O O  Graphics O O O O O  Drawings O O O O O  Tables O O O O O    Did you discover any errors in this manual   If so  on what page     RM GUI RSPS  342 Release 2 0 02 2013    Readers    Comments    Suggestions for improvement and additional information     General comments     Sender     Company   Department   Name   Telephone number   Street    Zip code   City    E mail     Date   Signature     Dear User   Please fill out and return this page    as a fax to the number  49  0 7127 14 1600 or  per mail to    Hirschmann Automation and Control GmbH  Department 01RD NT   Stuttgarter Str  45 51   72654 Neckartenzlingen    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    343    Readers    Comments    RM GUI RSPS  344 Release 2 0 02 2013    Further Support    D Further Support    Technical Questions  For technical ques
106. Module Type Type of the SFP transceiver  e g  M SFP SX LC    Serial Number Serial number of the SFP module    Supported Shows whether the media module supports the SFP transceiver   Temperature Operating temperature of the SFP transceiver in   Celsius    in   Celsius    Tx Power in mW Transmission power of the SFP transceiver in mW   Rx Power in mW Receiving power of the SFP transceiver in mW   Tx Power in dBm Transmission power of the SFP transceiver in dBm   Rx PowerindBm Receiving power of the SFP transceiver in dBm     Table 253  Table in the Diagnostics  Ports SFP dialog    RM GUI RSPS  268 Release 2 0 02 2013    Diagnostics 8 3 Ports    Parameters Meaning    Rx Power State Power level of the signal received  The threshold values are specified by  the SFP transceiver     v4 Signal strength is OK      amp  Signal strength is lower than the SFP manufacturer  recommendation  The signal can still be used      X  No signal or signal strength too low     Table 253  Table in the Diagnostics  Ports sFP dialog  cont      Buttons  Button Meaning  Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device   Help Opens the online help     Table 254  Buttons    8 3 4 Port Monitor    This feature monitors port states  The device offers you the ability to disable  the port or send a trap when user defined conditions occur  Definable port  conditions are link flap  CRC Fragments  and Duplex Mismatch Detection     Proceed as follows to enable the
107. N Global dialog       Buttons  Button Meaning  Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory     RAM  of the device     Table 156  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  178 Release 2 0 02 2013    Switching 5 5 VLAN    Button Meaning  Clear    Resets the VLAN settings of the device to the state on delivery   Caution  You block your access to the device if you have changed the    VLAN ID for the management functions of the device in the Basic  Settings Network dialog     Help Opens the online help     Table 156  Buttons  cont      5 5 2 Current    This dialog allows you to view the static and dynamic VLANs that are set up   The table shows the ports to which the device distributes the data packets for  the corresponding VLAN  and how the port handles the tagging of the data   packets  You can make changes to the entries in the   Switching VLAN  Static dialog     The device transmits the data packets in the corresponding VLAN if the vLAN  Unaware Mode function is deactivated in the  Switching Global  dialog     Table   Parameters Meaning   VLAN ID ID of the VLAN    Status Shows how the VLAN is set up    Possible values    other  Only for VLAN 1   permanent    Manually set up VLAN   If the device is reset  the configuration of this VLAN remains in the  device     Table 157  Table in the Switching VLAN Current dialog       RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 179    Switching 5 5 VLAN    Parameters Meaning    Creation Time Shows the time stamp for the operating tim
108. Possible values   Selected  default setting   The device loads the standard device configuration   Not selected  The device interrupts the restart and stops   To get access to the device again  use a V 24 link to switch to the  system monitor and load the standard device configuration there     Table 219  Configuration  frame in the Diagnostics System Selftest dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 243    Diagnostics 8 1 System    Note  The following settings block your access to the device permanently  if no readable device configuration is available for the device when it is  restarting  This is the case  for example  if the password for the device  configuration to be loaded differs from the password set in the device    Activate SysMon1  checkbox is not selected    Load default config on error  checkbox is not selected   To have the device unlocked again  contact your sales partner     Table  In this table you define how the device behaves in the case of an error     Parameters Meaning  Cause Error causes to which the device reacts     Possible values   task  The device detects errors in the applications executed  e g  if a task  terminates or is not available   resource  The device detects errors in the resources available  e g  if the  memory is becoming scarce   software  The device detects software errors  e g  error in the consistency  check   hardware  The device detects hardware errors  e g  in the chip set     Action Defines how the device behaves if the adjac
109. SA key  host key  is present in the device     Create    Possible values   selected  A key is present   not selected  No key is present     Creates a key  host key  on the device  The device only creates the key    Delete    when the server is deactivated     Length of the key created   2048 bit  RSA   1024 bit  DSA     To get the server to use the key created  you click  Set   Then you switch  the server on     Alternatively  you can copy your own key to the device in PEM format   see  the  Import  frame     Removes the key  host key  from the device     To permanently remove the key from the device  click  Set   Until you  restart the server  the existing connections remain in place  However  the    device prevents new connections from being set up     Table 61   Signature  frame in the Security Management Access Server dialog    SSH  tab page    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    85    Security    2 3 Management Access    Key Import    Parameters  URL    Import    Meaning  Defines the path and file name of your own DSA RSA key  host key      The device accepts the DSA RSA key if it has the following key length   2048 bit  RSA   1024 bit  DSA     The device gives you the following options for copying the key to the  device    File upload   If the key is on your PC or on a network drive  click      and select   the file that contains the key  host key     TFTP upload   If the key ison a TFTP server  enter the URL for the file in the following   form  tftp    lt IP address g
110. Save dialog  section   x3c  tblsheetnum gt  of 3     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 45    Basic Settings 1 4 Load Save    Parameters Meaning  Selected Shows whether the configuration profile is designated as  Selected      Possible values    Selected   The configuration profile is designated as  Selected         The device loads the configuration profile into the volatile memory   RAM  during the restart or when applying the function  Undo  Modification of Configuration           When you click  Save   the device saves the temporarily saved  settings in this configuration profile    Not selected   Another configuration profile is designated as  Selected      To designate another configuration profile as  Selected   you select the  desired configuration profile in the table and click  Select      Encrypted Shows whether the configuration profile is encrypted     Possible values   Selected  The configuration profile is encrypted   Not selected  The configuration profile is unencrypted     You activate deactivate the encryption of the configuration profile in the   Configuration Encryption  frame    Encryption Verified Shows whether the password of the encrypted configuration profile  matches the password stored in the device     Possible values   Selected  The passwords match  The device is able to unencrypt the  configuration profile   Not selected  The passwords are different  The device is unable to unencrypt the  configuration profile   Software Version Shows the version 
111. Severity Shows the urgent severity level at or above which the device immediately  sends an email alert     Possible values   emergency  alert  default setting   critical  error  warning  notice  informational  debug   Subject Defines the email subject for a given message type           Possible values   0  255 alphanumeric characters    Table 232   Urgent  frame in the Diagnostics Report Email Logging Global dialog       Non Urgent  Parameters Meaning  Severity Shows the non urgent severity level at or above which the device stores    the log in a buffer  Configure the non urgent severity level below the  urgent severity level  The device sends the log as an email alert after a  duration timeout or when the log buffer overflows     Possible values   emergency  alert  critical  error  warning  default setting   notice  informational  debug   Subject Defines the email subject for a given message type           Possible values   0  255 alphanumeric characters    Table 233   Non Urgent  frame in the Diagnostics Report Email Logging Global  dialog       RM GUI RSPS  254 Release 2 0 02 2013    Diagnostics    Table    Parameters  Index    Description    IP Address    TCP Port    Security    User ID    Password    Active    8 2 Report    Meaning    Shows a sequential number to which the table entry relates   The device automatically defines this number     Possible values   eg     Defines the name of the configured email server     Possible values   0  255 alphanumeric characters   
112. State    table    Parameters Meaning  Power Supply Shows the number of the power supply to which the table entry relates   Propagate State Defines whether the signal contact monitors the power supply     Possible values   Selected  default setting   The signal contact opens if one of the following conditions applies       The voltage source is providing an incorrect voltage       The voltage source fails       The power supply within the device is defective   Not selected  The signal contact remains closed under the conditions named above     Table 286  Propagate State  table in the Diagnostics Status  Configuration Signal Contact dialog       Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Help Opens the online help     Table 287  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  296 Release 2 0 02 2013    Diagnostics 8 4 Status Configuration    8 4 4 MAC Notification    MAC notification  also known as MAC address change notification  tracks  users on a network by storing the MAC address change activity  When the  switch learns or removes a MAC address  the device sends an SNMP trap to  a configured trap destination  The device generates MAC address change  notifications for dynamic unicast MAC addresses     The intended use of this functio
113. TION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR     OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE     Except as contained in this  notice  the name s  of the above copyright     holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the     sale  use or other dealings in this Software without prior written     authorization     RARE EERE EAE CASE ER RELE SERA SE AERA S REELS SN RRA S ERRATA RSA SAS ES ANS eee    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 333    Appendix A 8 Copyright of Integrated Software    A 8 6 OpenSSL    Copyright  c  1998 2008 The OpenSSL Project  All rights reserved       Redistribution and use in source and binary forms  with or without     modification  are permitted provided that the following conditions     are met      1  Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright     notice  this list of conditions and the following disclaimer      2  Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright  notice  this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in   the documentation and or other materials provided with the  distribution     3  All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this  software must display the following acknowledgment    This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project  for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit   http   www openssl org       4  The names  OpenSSL Toolkit  and  OpenSSL Project  must not be used  to endorse or promote products derived from this software without  prior written permission  For writt
114. Table 77  Table in the Security Port Security dialog  cont      98    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Security    Buttons    Button  Set    Reload  Wizard    Help    Table 78  Buttons    2 4 Port Security    Meaning   Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Opens the  Wizard     With the  Wizard  you assign the permitted MAC addresses to a port   Opens the online help     Wizard   Select Port    The  Wizard  helps you to connect the device ports with one or more  desired senders     Parameters  Select Port    Meaning  Defines the device port that you assign to the sender in the next step     Table 79  Wizard in the Security  Port Security dialog   Select Port  page    Wizard   Addresses    The  Wizard  helps you to connect the device ports with one or more  desired senders  When you have defined the settings  click  Finish   To  save the changes afterwards  click Set in the  Security Port Security     dialog     Parameters  VLAN    Meaning  Specifies the VLAN ID of the desired sender     Possible values   1  4042    Click  Add  to transfer the VLAN ID and the MAC address to the  Static  Addresses  field     Table 80  Wizard in the Security Port Security dialog   Addresses  page    RM GUI RSPS    Release 2 0 02 2013    99    Security    Param
115. Table 9   HiDiscovery Protocol  frame in the Basic Settings Network Global  dialog    Note  With the HiDiscovery software you can only access the device via  device ports that are members of the same VLAN as the device  management  You can see which VLAN a device port is assigned to in the  Switching VLAN Current dialog     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 29    Basic Settings    1 2 Network    BOOTP DHCP    Parameters  Client ID    Meaning   Shows the DHCP client ID that the device sends to the BOOTP or DHCP  server  If the server is configured accordingly  it reserves an IP address for  this DHCP client ID  Therefore  the device receives the same IP from the  server every time it requests it     The DHCP client ID that the device sends is the device name defined in  the  Name  field in the Basic Settings System dialog     Table 10   BOOTP DHCP  frame in the Basic Settings Network Global dialog    IP Parameter    This frame allows you to assign the IP parameters manually  These fields  can be edited if you have selected the Local option in the  IP Address  Assignment  field in the  Management Interface  frame     Parameters  IP Address    Netmask    Gateway Address    Meaning  Defines the IP address under which the device management can be  accessed via the network     Possible values   Valid IPv4 address  Default setting       Defines the netmask   The netmask identifies the network prefix and the host address of the  device in the IP address     Possible values    Valid IP
116. The device uses this specified value   see the  Bridge  column     In the RSTP protocol  the bridges negotiate a status change without a  specified delay     The STP protocol uses the parameter to delay the status change between  the statuses disabled  discarding  learning  forwarding    Max Age Shows the maximum permissible branch length specified by the root  bridge  i e  the number of devices to the root bridge           Possible values   6  40  default setting  20     The STP protocol uses the parameter to specify the validity of STP   BPDwUs in seconds     Table 209   Root  column in  Protocol Configuration Information  frame in the  Redundancy  Spanning Tree Global dialog  cont         Parameters Meaning  Bridge is Root Shows whether the device currently has the role of the root bridge     Possible values   Not selected  Another device currently has the role of the root bridge   Selected  The device currently has the role of the root bridge   Root Port Shows the number of the device port from which the current path leads to  the root bridge   If the device takes over the role of the root bridge  the field shows the value  0     Table 210  Topology  column in  Protocol Configuration   Information  frame in the  Redundancy  Spanning Tree Global dialog       RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 229    Redundancy 7 4 Spanning Tree    Parameters Meaning    Root Path Cost Shows the path cost for the path that leads from the root port of the device  to the root bridge of the layer
117. The menu contains the following dialogs   System  Network  Software  Load Save  External Memory  Port Configuration  Restart    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    21    Basic Settings 1 1 System    1 1 System    With this dialog you can display device properties and monitor individual  operating statuses     Device Status    The fields in this frame show the device status and inform you about   alarms that have occurred  You define the parameters that the device  monitors in the Diagnostics Status Configuration Device Status  dialog           Parameters Meaning  Symbol Shows the device status     Possible values   The device status is OK  The monitored parameters have the  desired status   An alarm has occurred  At least one monitored parameter differs   x  from the desired status   Alarm Start Time Shows the time at which the device triggered the alarm with the current  highest priority     Possible values   Date and time in the format Month  Day  Year hh mm ss  AM PM     The device triggers an alarm if a monitored parameter differs from the  desired status  In the Diagnostics Status Configuration Device Status  dialog  the parameters are sorted by priority  High priority at the top  low  priority at the bottom     Alarm Reason Shows the cause of the alarm and the current highest priority     Table 3   Device Status  frame in the Basic Settings System dialog    Note  The device reports an alarm if you only connect one power supply  unit for the supply voltage to a device wi
118. The settings are effective when the local clock operates as the Boundary  Clock  BC   For this  you select the value v2 boundary clock in the  PTP  Version Mode  field in the Time  PTP  Global dialog     Table  Parameters Meaning  Port Shows the number of the device port to which the table entry relates   PTP Enable Specifies whether the device port transmits PTP synchronization    messages     Possible values   selected  default setting   The device port sends and receives PTP synchronization messages   not selected  The device port blocks PTP synchronization messages     Table 116  Table in the Time  PTP  Boundary Clock  Port dialog  section   x3c   tblsheetnum gt  of 4     RM GUI RSPS  134 Release 2 0 02 2013    Time    Parameters  PTP Status    Sync Interval  s     Delay Mechanism    P2P Delay    3 3 PTP    Meaning  Displays the current status of the device port     Possible values     initializing   Initialization phase   faulty   Faulty mode  error in the PTP protocol   disabled   PTP is disabled on the device port   listening   Device port is waiting for PTP synchronization messages   pre master   PTP pre master mode   master   PTP master mode   passive   PTP passive mode   uncalibrated   PTP uncalibrated mode   slave   PTP slave mode       Defines the interval in seconds at which the device port transmits PTP  synchronization messages     Possible values     0 25   0 5   1  default setting   2    Defines the mechanism with which the device measures the delay for  tran
119. W WWWWT  w w w w WW w  Noo Rwh a V    Network Security    DoS  4 1 1 Global    Switching    Global  Rate Limiter  Filter for MAC addresses    Snooping    1  2   3 IGMP Querier  4 Multicasts    IGMP Snooping Enhancements    102  103  104  106    108    111    112  112  114    118  118  123    126  127  129  129  134  138  139  143    145    146  146    151    152  155  158    162  163  168  172  175    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Contents    5 5 VLAN  5 5 1 Global  5 5 2 Current  5 5 3 Static  5 5 4 Port  5 5 5 Voice   6 QoS Priority   6 1 Global   6 2 Port Configuration   6 3 802 1D p Mapping   6 4 IP DSCP Mapping   6 5 Queue Management   7 Redundancy   7 1 MRP   7 2 PRP  7 2 1 Configuration  7 2 2 DAN VDAN Table  7 2 3 Proxy Node Table  7 2 4 Statistics   7 3 HSR  7 3 1 Configuration  7 3 2 DAN VDAN Table  7 3 3 Proxy Node Table  7 3 4 Statistics   7 4 Spanning Tree  7 4 1 Global  7 4 2 Port   8 Diagnostics   8 1 System  8 1 1 System Information  8 1 2 Configuration Check  8 1 3 Selftest   8 2 Report  8 2 1 Global  8 2 2 Email Logging  Global  8 2 3 Email Logging  Addresses  8 2 4 Syslog   RM GUI RSPS    Release 2 0 02 2013    177  178  179  181  183  185    189    190  192  195  197  199    201    202    207  208  211  212  213    215  216  220  221  222    224  225  230    239    240  240  241  243    246  247  252  257  258    Contents    8 3    8 4    8 5    9 1    A 1  A 2  A 3  A 4  A 5  A 6  A 7    Persistent Logging  Hardware State  System Log   Audit Trail  
120. able to load and encrypt the settings in the  configuration profile the next time it restarts  For this case you specify in  the Diagnostics System Selftest dialog whether the device starts with  the factory settings or terminates the restart and stops     Note  Only configuration profiles in the non volatile memory  NVM  can be    designated as  Selected      If the checkbox in the  Auto save config on ENVM   field is selected in the  Basic Settings External Memory dialog  the device also designates the  configuration profile with the same name on the external memory as   Selected     Opens a menu with the following buttons    Exports the configuration profile selected in the table and saves it as an       XML file on the PC or on a server     The device gives you the following options for exporting a configuration    profile    Download to PC   To save the file on your PC or on a network drive  click       and select   the directory there    Download to a TFTP server   To save the file on a TFTP server  enter the URL for the file in the   following form    tftp    lt IP address gt   lt path gt   lt file name gt     Download to an SCP or SFTP server   To save the file on an SCP or SFTP server  enter the URL for the file   in one of the following forms        scp   orsftp    lt IP address gt   lt path gt   lt file name gt   When you click  OK   the device displays the  Authentication   window  There you enter the  User  and  Password  to login to the  server        scp   orsf
121. activated     Activate TCP SYN Activates or deactivates the TCP SYN scan     Protection    Possible values     Selected   The device detects ingress data packets with the TCP SYN flag set  and L4 source port  lt 1024 and discards these    Not selected  default setting    The TCP SYN scan is deactivated     Table 124  TCP UDP  frame in the Network Security DoS Global dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 147    Network Security 4 1 DoS    Parameter    Activate L4 Port  Protection    Activate Minimal  Header Filter    Meaning  Activates or deactivates the L4 port scan     Possible values   Selected  The device detects and discards ingress TCP or UDP data packets for  which source port number is identical to the destination port number   Not selected  default setting   The L4 port scan is deactivated     Activates or deactivates the minimal header scan     Possible values   Selected  The device detects and discards ingress data packets for which the  data offset value multiplied by 4 is smaller than the minimum TCP  header size   Not selected  default setting   The minimal header scan is deactivated     Table 124  TCP UDP  frame in the Network Security DoS Globa1 dialog  cont      IP    This frame allows you to activate or deactivate the land attack filter  With  the land attack method  the attacking station sends data packets whose  source and destination addresses are identical to those of the receiver   When you activate this filter  the device detects data packets with 
122. adecimal number  sequence that is easy to check  When you make this number sequence  available to the users via a reliable channel  they have the option to compare  both fingerprints  If the number sequences match  the client is connected to  the correct server     The device allows you to create the private and public keys  host keys   required for RSA and DSA directly on the device  Otherwise you have the  option to copy your own keys to the device in PEM format     Operation  Parameters Meaning  Operation If the function is switched on  encrypted access to the management    functions of the device is possible via the Command Line Interface  CLI      Possible values   OFF  Server is deactivated    On  default setting   Server is activated  You can access the management functions of the  device via SSH              The server can only be started if there is an RSA or DSA signature on the  device     When the function is switched off  existing connections remain in place   However  the device prevents new connections from being set up     Table 58   Operation  frame in the Securi ty Management Access Server dialog    SSH  tab page    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 83    Security 2 3 Management Access    Configuration  Parameters Meaning  Listen TCP Port Defines the number of the TCP port on which the server receives requests  from clients     Possible values   1  65535  default setting  22   Exception  Port 2222 is reserved for internal functions     The server restarts aut
123. ages     gee values    E  default setting    As the PTP slave  the device port measures the delay for the PTP   synchronization messages to the PTP master    The device displays the measured value in the Time  PTP  Transparent   Clock Global dialog    P2P   The device measures the delay for the PTP synchronization messages for   all the connected PTP devices  provided that these devices support P2P    This mechanism saves the device from having to determine the delay   again if there is a reconfiguration    E2E optimized   Like E2E  with the following special characteristics        The device only transmits the delay requests of the PTP slaves to the  PTP master  even though these requests are multicast messages  The  device thus spares the other devices from unnecessary multicast  requests        If the master slave topology changes  the device relearns the device  port for the PTP master as soon as it receives a synchronization  message from another PTP master        If the device does not know a PTP master  it transmits delay requests  to all device ports    disabled   The delay measuring is disabled on the device port  The device discards   messages for the delay measuring                                   Table 118   Operation IEEE1588   PTPv2 TC  frame in the Time  PTP Transparent  Clock Globa1l dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 139    Time    Parameters    Primary  Domain    Network  Protocol    Multi Domain  Mode    VLAN    VLAN Priority    3 3 PTP    Meaning
124. ails on  the path  the device calculates the new topology and reactivates these paths     The device supports the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol  RSTP  defined in  standard IEEE 802 1D 2004  This protocol is a further development of the  Spanning Tree Protocol  STP  and is compatible with it     The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol enables fast switching to a newly  calculated topology without interrupting existing connections  RSTP  achieves average reconfiguration times of less than a second  When you use  RSTP in a ring with 10 to 20 devices  you can achieve reconfiguration times  in the order of milliseconds     In this menu you configure and monitor the Spanning Tree functions     The menu contains the following dialogs   Global  Port    RM GUI RSPS  224 Release 2 0 02 2013    Redundancy 7 4 Spanning Tree    7 4 1 Global    With this dialog you can switch the Spanning Tree function on off  view  current values relating to the root bridge  and define the bridge settings     Operation  Parameters Meaning  Operation Switches the Spanning Tree function in the device on off     Possible values    On  default setting   Of  The device behaves transparently  The device floods received  Spanning Tree data packets like Multicast data packets to the device  ports              Table 206   Operation  frame in the Redundancy  Spanning Tree Global dialog       Protocol Version    Parameters Meaning    Protocol Version Shows the protocol used for the Spanning Tree function   With RSTP  IEEE 8
125. al networks   makes unwanted accessing more difficult and strengthens the system   against attacks such as MAC Flooding or MAC Spoofing     The device supports packet based    tagged    VLANs according to the IEEE  802 1Q standard  The VLAN tagging in the data packet indicates the VLAN  to which the data packet belongs     The device transmits the tagged data packets of a VLAN exclusively via ports  that are assigned to the same VLAN  This reduces the network load     Depending on the settings  we differentiate between the following VLANs   Static VLANs  VLANs set up manually by the user   Dynamic VLANs  VLANs set up automatically by the following mechanisms       Redundancy mechanisms    The device learns the MAC addresses for every VLAN separately   independent VLAN learning      RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 177    Switching 5 5 VLAN    The menu contains the following dialogs   Global  Current  Static  Port  Voice    5 5 1 Global    This dialog allows you to view general VLAN parameters for the device     Configuration  Parameters Meaning  Max  VLAN ID Biggest ID that you can assign to a VLAN     See the Switching VLAN  Static dialog   Max  Number of Maximum number of VLANs that you can set up in the device   VLANs See the Switching VLAN  Static dialog     Number of VLANs Number of VLANs currently set up in the device   See the Switching VLAN  Static dialog        The VLAN with ID 1 is always set up in the device     Table 155   Configuration  frame in the Switching VLA
126. alog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 241    Diagnostics 8 1 System    Parameters Meaning  Level Level of deviation between this device s configuration and the  recognized neighboring devices  The rule level can have 3 statuses     O Information  The performance of the communication between the  two devices is not impaired     PN Warning  The performance of the communication between the two  devices may be impaired     Error  Communication between the two devices is impaired     Message The dialog specifies more precisely the information  warnings and errors  having occurred     Table 217  Table in the Diagnostics System Configuration Check dialog  cont      Note  A neighboring device without LLDP support  which forwards LLDP  packets  may be the cause of equivocal messages in the dialog  This  occurs if the neighboring device is a hub or a switch without management   which ignores the IEEE 802 1D 2004 standard    In this case  the dialog displays the devices recognized and connected to  the neighboring device as connected to the switch port  even though they  are connected to the neighboring device     Note  If you have more than 39 VLANs configured on the device  the  dialog always shows a warning  The reason is the limited number of  possible VLAN data sets in LLDP frames with a maximum length  The  device compares the first 39 VLANs automatically    If you have 40 or more VLANs configured on a device  check the  congruence of the further VLANs manually  if necessary   
127. ameters Meaning  Name Defines a name for the SNMP manager   Possible values    1  32 alphanumeric characters  including the following special characters   I H  8             lt   gt  ON     Address Defines the IP address and the port number of the SNMP manager     Possible values    lt Valid IPv4 address gt   lt port number gt           Table 293  Table in the Diagnostics Status Configuration Alarms  Traps  dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 299    Diagnostics    Parameters  Active    8 4 Status Configuration    Meaning    Defines whether the device sends SNMP messages  traps  to this SNMP  manager     Possible values   Selected  default setting   The device sends traps to this SNMP manager   Not selected  The device does not send traps to this SNMP manager        Table 293  Table in the Diagnostics Status Configuration Alarms  Traps  dialog    Buttons    Button  Set    Reload    Create    Remove  Help    Table 294  Buttons    300    Meaning   Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Opens the  Create  dialog to add a new entry to the table    In the  Create  dialog you define the name and the IP address and port  number of the SNMP manager    If you choose not to enter a port number  the device automatically adds  the port number 162    
128. anges afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save      Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device     Adds a new table entry    Removes the selected table entry    Sends an email to the configured address containing the log messages   Sends a test email to the configured address    Opens the online help     Meaning of the severities for events    Severity  emergency  alert  critical  error  warning    notice       informational       debug    Meaning   Device not ready for operation  Immediate user intervention required  Critical status   Error status   Warning   Significant  normal status   Informal message   Debug message    Table 236  Meaning of the severities for events    256    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Diagnostics    8 2 Report    8 2 3 Email Logging  Addresses    Use this table to define the destination email addresses for the respective    message type     Table    Parameters  Index    Message Type    Address    Active    Meaning    Shows a sequential number to which the table entry relates   The device automatically defines this number     Possible values   1  10    Defines the log message type to send to the destination email address     Possible values   urgent  non urgent    Defines the destination email address for the email alert     Possible values   Valid e mail address  0  255 alphanumeric characters    Activates deactivates the transmission of email alerts for the en
129. anges afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save      Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device     Resets all the settings in the dialog to the default settings and transfers  this change to the volatile memory of the device  RAM      Opens the online help     279    Diagnostics 8 4 Status Configuration    8 4 Status Configuration    Use the dialogs in this menu to define the functions that the device monitors  and the notification process     The menu contains the following dialogs   Device Status  Security Status  Signal Contact  MAC Notification  Alarms  Traps     RM GUI RSPS  280 Release 2 0 02 2013    Diagnostics 8 4 Status Configuration    8 4 1 Device Status    The device status provides an overview of the overall condition of the device   Many process visualization systems record the device status for a device in  order to present its condition in graphic form     The device displays its current status as  Error  or  OK  in the  Device  Status  frame  The device determines this status from the individual  monitoring results     The device displays the detected faults in the  Device Status  frame of the  Basic Configuration  System dialog for the monitored functions  The device  displays the detected fault with the higher priority when 2 or more detected  faults occur at the same time  The order of the functions listed in the   Monitoring  frame represents the monitor priority  Meaning
130. ann devices to be detected via LLDP and learned as query ports     n             Possible values   off  default setting     Active    n             Table 146   Configuration  dialog in the Switching  IGMP Snooping Enhancements    wizard    170    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Switching 5 4 IGMP    Parameters Meaning   Forward All Defines the port as Forward A11  With the Forward A11 setting  the  device transmits at this port all data packets with a Multicast address in the  destination address field     Possible values     off  default setting     Active             Table 146   Configuration  dialog in the Switching IGMP Snooping Enhancements  wizard  cont      Button Meaning   Back Displays the previous page again  Changes are lost   Next Saves the changes and opens the next page    Finish Saves the changes and completes the configuration   Cancel Closes the Wizard  Changes are lost     Table 147  Buttons    After closing the Wizard  click  Set  to save your settings     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 171    Switching 5 4 IGMP    5 4 3 IGMP Querier    The device allows you to send a Multicast stream only to those ports to which  a Multicast receiver is connected     To determine which ports Multicast receivers are connected to  the device  sends query data packets to the ports at a definable interval  If a Multicast  receiver is connected  it joins the Multicast stream by responding to the  device with a report data packet     This dialog allows you to configure the
131. anning Tree Port dialog  section   x3c  tblsheetnum gt  of 4        RM GUI RSPS  232 Release 2 0 02 2013    Redundancy 7 4 Spanning Tree    Parameters Meaning  Received Port ID Shows the port ID of the device from which this device port last received  an STP BPDU     Possible values   For device ports with the designated role  the device displays the  information for the STP BPDU last received by the port  This helps to  diagnose the possible STP problems in the network   For the alternate  backup  master and root port roles  in the  stationary condition  static topology  this information is identical to the  information of the designated port role   If a device port has no connection  or if it has not received any STP   BDPUs yet  the device displays the values that the device port would  send with the designated role     Received Path Cost Shows the path cost that the higher level bridge has from its root port to  the root bridge        Possible values   For device ports with the designated role  the device displays the  information for the STP BPDU last received by the port  This helps to  diagnose the possible STP problems in the network   For the alternate  backup  master and root port roles  in the  stationary condition  static topology  this information is identical to the  information of the designated port role   If a device port has no connection  or if it has not received any STP   BDPUs yet  the device displays the values that the device port would  send with the 
132. as follows   L  If the device port is still receiving BPDUs       Onthe CIST  tab page  remove the selection from the checkbox  in the  Admin Edge Port  column   or      Inthe Redundancy Spanning Tree Global dialog  remove the  selection in the  BPDU Guard  checkbox   O To activate the device port  in the Basic Configuration  Port  Configuration dialog  select the checkbox in the  Port on  column  for this device port     Table 208  Protocol Configuration Information  frame   Bridge  column  in the  Redundancy  Spanning Tree Global dialog  section  x3c  tblsheetnum gt        of 3   Parameters Meaning  Bridge ID Shows the bridge ID of the current root bridge   Possible values    lt Bridge priority gt     lt MAC address gt   The bridge ID is made up of the bridge priority and the MAC address   Priority Shows the bridge priority of the current root bridge     Possible values   0  61440 in steps of 4096    Table 209   Root  column in  Protocol Configuration Information  frame in the  Redundancy  Spanning Tree Global dialog       RM GUI RSPS  228 Release 2 0 02 2013    Redundancy 7 4 Spanning Tree    Parameters Meaning    Hello Time  s  Shows the time in seconds defined by the root bridge between the sending  of two configuration messages  Hello data packets      Possible values   Lb    The device uses this specified value   see the  Bridge  column     Forward Delay  s    Shows the delay time in seconds defined by the root bridge for status  changes     Possible values   4  30    
133. as zip archive 251    Saving event log permanently  Secure shell   Security status   Selftest   Setting the system time  Severity for events   SFP module   SFP module temperature    340    260   83   286   243   112  127    252  256    268  268    SFP state display 268  Signal contact 291  Signature  SSH  85  SNMPv1 v2 Community name 87  SNMP manager 299  SNMP messages  traps  299  SNMP server 74  SNTP 118  SNTP client 118  SNTP server 123  Software update 37  Spanning Tree Protocol 224  SSH server 83  Starting the graphical user interface  GUI  14  Static VLANs 181  Statistics table  ports  266  Status line via menu 15  Switch dump  zip archive  251  Syslog 258  System information  HTML  240  System log 264  System monitor 243  System requirements  GUI  13  Technical Questions 345  Telnet client 310  Telnet server 76  Temperature  SFP module  268  Time 111  Time setting 112  114  127  Topology discovery 241  301  305  Training Courses 345  Transparent Clock  PTP  139  Traps  SNMP messages  299  Trap configuration  Device status  282  Trust mode 192  U  Unaware mode  VLAN  152  Updating device software 37  User management 62  User defined VLANs 181  Utilization thresholds 155  Utilization  ports  267  RM GUI RSPS    Release 2 0 02 2013    Index    Virtual Local Area Network  VLAN   VLANs dynamic   VLANs set up   VLANs static   VLAN ports   VLAN settings   VLAN unaware mode  VLAN  management   Volatile memory  RAM     WwW  Watchdog    Z    Zip archive  system information     R
134. asic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Wizard Opens a Wizard that supports you in selecting and configuring a VLAN  port    Help Opens the online help     Table 144  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 169    Switching    5 4 IGMP    Wizard   Select VLAN Port    This page of the Wizard allows you to assign a VLAN ID to a port     Parameters  VLAN ID    Port    Meaning  Select the ID of the VLAN   Possible values   1  4042  Select the device port     Possible values   Toly 1 2  Ty 3 ete     Table 145  Select VLAN Port  dialog in the Switching  IGMP Snooping Enhancements    Wizard    Wizard   Configuration    This page of the Wizard allows you to configure the selected port     Parameters  VLAN ID    Port    Static    Learn by LLDP    Meaning  Shows the ID of the VLAN to which the table entry applies     Possible values   1  4042  VLAN IDs that are set up     Shows the number of the device port to which the table entry relates     Possible values   de dy 2A keget     Defines the port as a    static query port     The device only transmits IGMP  report messages to the ports at which it receives IGMP queries  Allows  you to also transmit IGMP report messages to other selected ports   enable  or connected Hirschmann devices  Automatic      Possible values   off  default setting   Active  Defines the portas Learned by LLDP  Allows directly connected  Hirschm
135. ation profile only if it is unencrypted  If the configuration encryption  is active  the device imports the device configuration only if it is encrypted  and the password matches the password stored in the device    Shows the settings of the configuration profile selected in the table in clear  text as an XML    If the configuration profile is encrypted  enter the password in order to see  the settings in clear text    Copies the configuration profile selected in the table and saves it with a  user defined name in the non volatile memory  NVM   The device  designates the new configuration profile as  Selected      Note  Before creating additional configuration profiles  decide for or  against permanently activated configuration encryption in the device   Save additional configuration profiles either unencrypted or encrypted with  the same password     If the checkbox in the  Auto save config on ENVM  field is selected in the  Basic Settings External Memory dialog  the device also designates the  configuration profile with the same name on the external memory as   Selected         Table 29  Buttons  section  x3c  tblsheetnum gt  of 5     50    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Basic Settings 1 4 Load Save    Button Meaning  Back to factory Resets the settings in the device to the factory settings   defaults    The device deletes the saved configuration profiles from the volatile    memory  RAM  and from the non volatile memory  NVM     If an external memory is connected  the
136. ave dialog and click  Save      Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device     Table 226  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  250 Release 2 0 02 2013    Diagnostics    Button    Download Support  Information    Download JAR File    Help    Meaning    8 2 Report    Opens the  Save  dialog  This dialog allows you to save a ZIP archive on  your PC that contains system information about the device    The device generates the file name of the ZIP archive automatically based  on the format  lt IP address gt   lt device name gt  zip    You will find an explanation of the files contained in the ZIP archive in the       following section     Opens the  Save  dialog  The dialog allows you to save the Java Applet of  the graphical user interface  GUI  on your PC as a JAR file    When you start the JAVA Applet  you have the option of administering the  device  even if its HTTP server is switched off for security reasons    The device generates the file name of the Java Applet automatically based  Flware version   gt      on the format  lt product gt   lt soi     lt build no  gt  Jar   Opens the online help     Table 226  Buttons  cont            Support Information  Files contained in ZIP archive    System information  Audit trail    Output of CLI commands   show port all  show system info  show mac addr table  show mac filter table  igmp snooping   Default device configuration    Device configuration    Support Information    System informat
137. bound data packets   For outbound packets  you specify which QoS prioritization information  the device writes in the data packet  e g  priority for management packets   port priority      Note  Switch off flow control if you use the functions in this menu  The flow  control is switched off if  Activate Flow Control  is unselected in the  Switching Global dialog   Configuration  frame         The menu contains the following dialogs   Global  Port Configuration  802 1D p Mapping  IP DSCP Mapping  Queue Management    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 189    QoS Priority    6 1 Global    6 1 Global    The device allows you to maintain access to the management functions   even in situations with heavy utilization  In this dialog you define the required    QoS priority settings    Configuration  Parameters Meaning  VLAN Priority for Defines the VLAN priority for management data packets to be sent  The  Management device sends the management data packets with the priority specified  packets here     IP DSCP Value for  Management  packets    Number of Queues  per Port    Possible values   0   7  default setting  0     In the QoS Priority 802 1D p Mapping dialog you assign the VLAN  priority to the traffic classes and thus the data packets to a priority queue  of the port     Defines the DSCP value for data packets that the management of the  device sends     Possible values   0   63  default setting  0  be cs0       Some values in the list also have a DSCP keyword  e g  be cs0  af11 
138. cessing of the priority queue with Weighted Fair  Queuing     You have the option of assigning minimum bandwidths for Weighted Fair  Queuing to traffic classes     Table    Parameters Meaning  Traffic Class Shows the traffic class assigned to a priority queue of the ports     Strict Priority   Defines whether the device processes the priority queues of the ports with   Strict Priority  or with Weighted Fair Queuing     Possible values    Selected  default setting    Strict Priority        You use this setting for time  and latency critical applications such as  VoIP or video        The device port only sends data packets that are in the priority queue  with the highest priority  If this priority queue is empty  the device port  sends data packets that are in the priority queue with the next lower  priority        The device port only sends data packets with a lower traffic class when  the priority queues with a higher priority are empty  In unfavorable  situations  the device port never sends these data packets         Inthis setting  the device switches the function on automatically  even  for all traffic classes with a higher priority    Not selected   Weighted Fair Queuing Weighted Round Robin  WRR         The user assigns a minimum bandwidth to each traffic class        The device port transmits data packets with a low traffic class even if  there is high utilization         Inthis setting  the device switches the function off automatically  even  for all traffic classes 
139. checking it     Defines the authentication protocol that the device applies for user access  via SNMPv3     Possible values   hmacmd5  For this user account  the device uses protocol HMAC MD5   hmacsha  For this user account  the device uses protocol HMUAC SHA     Defines the encryption protocol that the device applies for user access via  SNMPVv3     Possible values   none  No encryption  des  DES encryption  aesCfb128  AES 128 encryption       Table 39   New Entry  frame in the Security User Management dialog  section   x3c  tblsheetnum gt  of 3     Buttons    Button  Set    Set and back    Back  Reload    Remove  Create  Help    Table 40  Buttons    68    Meaning    Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save      Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device and goes  back to the previous dialog     Displays the previous dialog again  Changes are lost     Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device     Removes the selected table entry   Adds a new table entry   Opens the online help     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Security 2 2 Authentication List    2 2 Authentication List    The device only allows users to access its management functions when they  log in with valid login data  The device authenticates the users either using  the local user management or with a RADIUS
140. chosen value appears in the table instead of  filling the cells with the values assigned by the device  This makes it easier  to analyze and sort the table according to your wishes    All  Displays every assigned value in the table   Learned  L   Displays in the table the cells which contain  among other possible  values  the value L  When this value is selected cells containing  values other than L are displayed as           Static  S   Displays in the table the cells which contain  among other possible  values  the value S  When this value is selected cells containing  values other than s are displayed as             Automatic  A   Displays in the table the cells which contain  among other possible  values  the value A  When this value is selected cells containing  values other than A are displayed as           Learn by LLDP  ALA   Displays in the table the cells which contain  among other possible  values  the value ALA  When this value is selected cells containing  values other than ALA are displayed as          Forward all  FA   Displays in the table the cells which contain  among other possible  values  the value FA  When this value is selected cells containing    values other than FA are displayed as                Table 143  Display Categories  pulldown menu in the switching  IGMP  Snooping  Enhancements dialog    Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the B
141. chronization messages     Possible values   IEEE 802 3  default setting   UDP IPv4  Defines the interval in seconds at which the device port transmits  messages for the PTP topology discovery   Assign the same value to all devices of a PTP domain                          Possible values   1  2  default setting   4  8  16    Defines the timeout for the announce interval     Possible values   2  10  default setting  3     The value represents the number of the announce intervals   Assign the same value to all devices of a PTP domain     Example  For the standard setting  Announce Interval   2 s and Announce  Timeout   3   the Timeout is 3x 2s 6s     Shows the interval in seconds at which the device port measures the End   to End delay   If the device port is operating as the PTP master  the device assigns  the port the value 8   If the device port is operating as the PTP slave  the value is defined  by the PTP master connected to the port     Table 116  Table in the Time  PTP Boundary Clock  Port dialog  section   x3c   tblsheetnum gt  of 4     136    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Time 3 3 PTP    Parameters Meaning  V1 Hardware Defines whether the device port adjusts the length of the PTP  Compatibility synchronization messages when you have set the value  UDP IPv4  in the    Network Protocol field   It is possible that other devices in the network expect the PTP  synchronization messages to be the same length as PTPv1 messages     Possible values   auto  default setting 
142. ciated documentation files  the  Software    to deal  in the Software without restriction  including without limitation the rights to  use  copy  modify  merge  publish  distribute  sublicense  and or sell copies  of the Software  and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to  do so  subject to the following conditions     The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all  copies or substantial portions of the Software     THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED  AS IS   WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY  KIND  EXPRESS OR IMPLIED  INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE  WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY  FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE  AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM   DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY  WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF  CONTRACT  TORT OR OTHERWISE  ARISING FROM  OUT OF OR IN  CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER  DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 321    Appendix A 8 Copyright of Integrated Software    A 8 3 libcurl  Copyright  c  1996   2012  Daniel Stenberg   lt daniel haxx se gt    All rights reserved     Permission to use  copy  modify  and distribute this software for any purpose  with or without fee is hereby granted  provided that the above copyright  notice and this permission notice appear in all copies     THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED  AS IS   WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY  KIND  EXPRESS OR IMPLIED  INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE  WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY  F
143. clock  Grandmaster      The device allows you to influence which device in the network becomes  the reference clock  Grandmaster   To do this  you go to the  Operation  IEEE1588   PTPv2 BC  frame and modify the value in the  Priority 1  field  or the  Priority 2  field     Parameters Meaning   Priority 1 Shows priority 1 for the device that is currently the reference time source   Grandmaster     Clock Class Class of the reference clock  Grandmaster    Parameter for the Best Master Clock algorithm    Clock Accuracy Estimated accuracy of the reference clock  Grandmaster    Parameter for the Best Master Clock algorithm    Clock Variance Variance of the reference clock  also known as the    offset scaled log  variance      Parameter for the Best Master Clock algorithm    Priority 2 Shows priority 2 for the device that is currently the reference clock   Grandmaster      Table 113   Grandmaster  frame in the Time  PTP Boundary Clock Globa1 dialog          RM GUI RSPS  132 Release 2 0 02 2013    Time    3 3 PTP    Local Time Properties    Parameters  Time Source    UTC Offset  s     UTC Offset valid    Time Traceable    Frequency  Traceable    PTP Timescale    Meaning    Defines the time source from which the local clock gets its time  information     Possible values   tomicClock   ps  errestrialRadio  tp   tp  andset  ther  nternalOscillator  default setting     Defines the difference between the PTP time scale and the UTC   See the  PTP Timescale  field                g  t  P  n 
144. ct name specified by the memory manufacturer   Version Shows the version number specified by the memory manufacturer   Serial Number Shows the serial number specified by the memory manufacturer        Table 30  Table in the Basic Settings External Memory dialog  section   x3c   tblsheetnum gt  of 2     RM GUI RSPS  52 Release 2 0 02 2013    Basic Settings    Parameters    Enable Automatic  Software Update    Config Priority    Auto save config on  envm    1 5 External Memory    Meaning  Defines whether the device updates the device software when it restarts     Possible values    selected  default setting    During a restart the device updates the device software when the   following files are located in the external memory        the image file of the device software       atextfile startup txt with the content   autoUpdate FILE NAME OF THE IMAGE FILE   Not selected   The device performs the restart without updating the device software   Specifies which memory the device loads the configuration profile from  when it restarts                       Possible values    disable   The device loads the configuration profile from the non volatile   memory  NVM     first  second  third   The device loads the configuration profile from the external memory   ENVM    If the device does not find a configuration profile on the external  memory  it loads the configuration profile from the non volatile  memory  NVM         Note  When loading the configuration profile from the external memor
145. d Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Save Transfers the settings from the volatile memory  RAM  into the  configuration profile designated as  Selected  in the non volatile memory   NVM      If the checkbox in the  Auto save config on ENVM   field is selected in the  Basic Settings External Memory dialog  the device generates a copy of  the configuration profile on the external memory        Table 29  Buttons  section  x3c  tblsheetnum gt  of 5     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 47    Basic Settings    Button  Activate    Delete    1 4 Load Save    Meaning  Loads the settings of the configuration profile selected in the table to the  volatile memory  RAM     The device terminates the connection to the graphical user interface   O Reload the graphical user interface   O Login again   The device immediately uses the settings of the configuration profile  in the current operation        Switch on the function  Undo Modifications of Configuration  before you  activate another configuration profile  If the connection is lost afterwards   the device loads the last configuration profile designated as  Selected   from the non volatile memory  NVM   The device can then be accessed  again     If the configuration encryption is inactive  the device loads the  configuration profile only if it is unencrypted  If the configuration encryption  is active  the device loads the configuration 
146. dates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory     RAM  of the device   Reset port counters Resets the counter for the port statistics to 0   Help Opens the online help     Table 250  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  266 Release 2 0 02 2013    Diagnostics    8 3 Ports    8 3 2 Utilization    This dialog displays the utilization  network load  for the individual device    ports     Table    Parameters  Port  Utilization        Lower    Threshold        Upper  Threshold        Control Interval  s     Alarm    Meaning   Shows the number of the device port to which the table entry relates   Shows the current utilization in percent in relation to the time interval  specified in the  Control Interval  s   column    The utilization is the relationship of the received data quantity to the  maximum possible data quantity at the currently configured data rate   Defines a lower threshold for the utilization  If the utilization of the device  port falls below this value  the  Alarm  field shows an alarm     Possible values   0 00  100 00  default setting  0 00     The value 0 deactivates the lower threshold     Defines an upper threshold for the utilization  If the utilization of the device  port exceeds this value  the  Alarm  field shows an alarm     Possible values   0 00  100 00  default setting  0 00     The value 0 deactivates the upper threshold   Defines the interval in seconds     Possible values   1  3600  default setting  30     The value 0 deactivates the savin
147. designated role     Admin Edge Port Specifies whether a terminal device is connected to the device port        Possible values   Not selected  default setting   An STP bridge is connected to the device port   After the connection is set up  the device port switches to the  learning state before switching to the forwarding State  if  applicable   Selected  A terminal device is connected to the device port       After the connection is set up  the device port switches to the  forwarding state without switching to the learning state  beforehand       If the device port receives an STP BPDU  the device deactivates  the port if the BPDU Guard function is switched on in the  Redundancy Spanning Tree Global dialog           Table 212  CIST  tab page in the Redundancy Spanning Tree Port dialog  section   x3c   tblsheetnum gt  of 4     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 233    Redundancy    Parameters  Auto Edge Port    Oper Edge Port    Oper PointToPoint    7 4 Spanning Tree    Meaning    Activates deactivates the automatic detection of whether a terminal device  is connected to the device port    This setting is only effective if the device checkbox in the  Admin Edge  Port  column is not selected     Possible values   Selected  default setting   After the connection is set up  after 1 5 x  Hello Time  the device sets  the device port to the forwarding state  default setting 1 5 x 2 s  if  the port has not received any STP BPDUs during this time   Not selected  After the connection is
148. dge priority than the  devices in the connected RSTP network  You thus help avoid a connection  interruption for devices outside the Ring     RM GUI RSPS  202 Release 2 0 02 2013    Redundancy 7 1 MRP    A WARNING    RING LOOP HAZARD    To avoid loops during the configuration phase  configure all the devices    individually  Before you connect the redundant line  be sure to complete the  configuration of all the devices     Failure to follow these instructions can result in death  serious injury   or equipment damage        Operation  Parameters Meaning  Operation When you have configured all the parameters for the MRP Ring  you    switch the function on here     Possible values   Off  default setting   On  When you have configured all the devices in the MRP Ring  the  redundancy is activated     Table 178  Operation  frame in the Redundancy  MRP dialog    Ring Port 1 Ring Port 2    Parameters Meaning  Port Number of the device port that is operating as a ring port   Operation Shows the operating status of the ring port     Possible values   forwarding  Port is switched on  connection exists   blocked  Port is blocked  connection exists   disabled  Port is disabled   not connected  No connection exists     Table 179  Ring Port 1  frame  Ring Port 2  frame in the Redundancy  MRP dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 203    Redundancy    7 1 MRP    Configuration    Parameters  Ring Manager    Advanced Mode    Ring Recovery    Meaning  Defines whether the device is operatin
149. dy  defines as a source port in the table     The value no Port means  No destination port     Table 266   Destination Port  frame in the Diagnostics Ports Port Mirroring  dialog          RM GUI RSPS  278 Release 2 0 02 2013    Diagnostics    Table    Parameters  Source Port    Enabled    Type    8 3 Ports    Meaning  Number of the device port to which the table entry relates     Possible values     lt Port number gt   Enables disables the copying of the data packets from this device port to  the destination port     Possible values   Not selected  default setting   The copying of the data packets is disabled   Selected  The copying of the data packets is enabled  The port is specified as a  source port   Disabled  It is not possible to copy the data packets for this port   Possible causes       The port is specified as a destination port       The port is a logical port  not a physical port   Specifies which data packets the device copies to the destination port     Possible values   none  default setting   No data packets   tx  Data packets that the source port transmits   rx  Data packets that the source port receives   txrx  Data packets that the source port transmits and receives     Table 267  Table in the Diagnostics Ports Port Mirroring dialog    Buttons    Button  Set    Reload  Reset Config    Help    Table 268  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS    Release 2 0 02 2013       Meaning    Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the ch
150. e  and also configure it for each port and each VLAN     Operation  Parameters Meaning  Operation When the function is switched on  the IGMP Snooping function according    to RFC 4541  Considerations for Internet Group Management Protocol   IGMP  and Multicast Listener Discovery  MLD  Snooping Switches  is  activated in the device     Possible values   On  When the function is switched on  the IGMP Snooping protocol is  activated globally in the device   off  default setting   When the function is switched off  the device transmits received query   report and leave data packets without evaluating them  Received data  packets with a Multicast destination address are transmitted to all  ports by the device              Table 137  Operation  frame in the Switching  IGMP  IGMP Snooping dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 163    Switching 5 4 IGMP  Information  Parameters Meaning    Multicast Control  Frames Processed    Shows the number of Multicast control data packets processed    This statistic encompasses the following packet types        IGMP Reports       IGMP Queries version V1       IGMP Queries version V2       IGMP Queries version V3       IGMP Queries with an incorrect version       PIM or DVMRP packets   The device uses the Multicast control data packets to create the address  table for transmitting the Multicast data packets     Possible values   0  231 1    You use the  Reset IGMP Snooping Counter  button in the Basic  Settings  Restart dialog or the clear ig
151. e  system uptime   The VLAN  has been set up in the device since this time     Possible values   day s   hh mm ss  Port Shows on which ports the device transmits the data packets for the  corresponding VLANs  and how it handles the VLAN tagging     Possible values     The port does not transmit any data packets for the VLAN  The port is  not a member of the VLAN    T   The port transmits data packets with a VLAN tag  tagged     U   The port transmits data packets without a VLAN tag  untagged         Table 157  Table in the Switching VLAN  Current dialog  cont      Buttons  Button Meaning  Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device   Help Opens the online help     Table 158  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  180 Release 2 0 02 2013    Switching 5 5 VLAN    5 5 3 Static    This dialog allows you to set up and manage VLANs  For each VLAN you  specify to which ports the sending of a data packet is allowed  and whether  the port sends the data packet with or without a VLAN tag    This dialog allows you to create and manage VLANs  In the table you assign  the VLANs that are set up to the device ports  In the process you define  whether a port transmits data packets in the corresponding VLAN  and how  the port handles the VLAN tagging     The device transmits the data packets in the corresponding VLAN if the vLAN  Unaware Mode function is deactivated in the  Switching Global  dialog     Note  The VLAN settings are only effective if the
152. e Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Help Opens the online help     Table 72  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 93    Security 2 3 Management Access    2 3 12 CLI Login Banner    This tab page allows you to replace the CLI start screen with your own text     In the state on delivery  the CLI start screen shows information about the  device  such as the software version and the device settings  With the  function on this tab page  you deactivate this information and replace it with  an individually defined text     To display your own text in the CLI and in the graphical user interface before  the login  you use the Security Pre login Banner dialog     Operation  Parameters Meaning  Operation When this function is switched on  the device shows the text information    defined in the  Banner Text  field to all the users that login to the device  via the Command Line Interface  CLI      When the function is switched off  the CLI start screen shows information  about the device  The text information in the  Banner Text  field is kept     Possible values   off  default setting    On             Table 73   Operation  frame in the Security Management Access CLI dialog   Login  Banner  tab page    Banner Text    Parameters Meaning    Banner Text Defines the character string that the device displays in the Command Line  Interface at the start of every com
153. e configuration in the device differs from the device  configuration on the external memory     Ring redundancy Defines whether the signal contact monitors the ring redundancy        Possible values    Ignore  default setting    The signal contact ignores this parameter    Monitor   The signal contact opens in the following situations        The redundancy function becomes active  loss of redundancy        The device is a normal ring participant and detects an error in the  local configuration        Table 282  Monitoring Correct Operation  frame in the Diagnostics Status  Configuration Signal Contact dialog  cont         Manual Setting    This frame allows you to control the signal contact remotely  This is useful  in the following situations  for example    Simulating an error during SPS error monitoring    Remote control of a device via SNMP  such as switching on a camera     Parameters Meaning  Contact Defines the status of the signal contact     Possible values   Opened  default setting   The signal contact is opened   Closed  The signal contact is closed     Table 283   Manual Setting  frame in the Diagnostics Status  Configuration Signal Contact dialog       RM GUI RSPS  294 Release 2 0 02 2013    Diagnostics    8 4 Status Configuration    Device Status    This frame shows the status of the signal contact   The signal contact indicates the device status if you have selected the   Device Status  option field in the  Signal Contact Mode  frame   The signal contact indica
154. e credit is given to the author and the    OpenBSD project by leaving this copyright notice intact     RM GUI RSPS  326 Release 2 0 02 2013    Appendix A 8 Copyright of Integrated Software    4     The Rijndael implementation by Vincent Rijmen  Antoon Bosselaers and  Paulo Barreto is in the public domain and distributed with the following  license        version 3 0  December 2000     Optimised ANSI C code for the Rijndael cipher  now AES        author Vincent Rijmen  lt vincent rijimen esat kuleuven ac be gt       author Antoon Bosselaers  lt antoon bosselaers esat kuleuven ac be gt      author Paulo Barreto  lt paulo barreto terra com br gt           This code is hereby placed in the public domain      THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHORS  AS IS  AND     ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT     LIMITED TO  THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY     AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED      INNO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE   LIABLE  FOR ANY DIRECT  INDIRECT  INCIDENTAL  SPECIAL      EXEMPLARY  OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  INCLUDING  BUT     NOT LIMITED TO  PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR     SERVICES  LOSS OF USE  DATA  OR PROFITS  OR   BUSINESS  INTERRUPTION  HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY     THEORY OF LIABILITY  WHETHER IN CONTRACT  STRICT     LIABILITY  OR TORT  INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE      ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE    EVEN  IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE     RM GUI RSPS  Re
155. e device uses the value specified by the root bridge   see  the  Root  column     In the RSTP protocol  the bridges negotiate a status change without a  specified delay     The STP protocol uses the parameter to delay the status change  between the statuses disabled  discarding  learning   forwarding    The parameters  Forward Delay  and  Max Age  have the following relationship    Forward Delay 2  Max Age 2   1   If you enter a value in the field that contradict this relationship  the device replaces these values  with the last valid values or with the default value           Table 208   Protocol Configuration Information  frame   Bridge  column  in the  Redundancy  Spanning Tree Global dialog  section  x3c  tblsheetnum gt   of 3        RM GUI RSPS  226 Release 2 0 02 2013    Redundancy    7 4 Spanning Tree    Parameters    Meaning    Specifies the maximum permissible branch length  i e  the number of    Max Age    Tx Hold Count    devices to the root bridge     Possible values   6  40  default setting  20     If the device takes over the role of the root bridge  the other devices in  the network use the value defined here    Otherwise the device uses the value specified by the root bridge   see  the  Root  column     The STP protocol uses the parameter to specify the validity of STP   BPDUs in seconds     Limits the maximum transmission rate for sending BPDUs     Possible values   1  10  default setting  10     When the device sends a BPDU  it increments a counter at this d
156. e dialogs in this menu show information on statuses and events that the  device has logged  In service cases  this information helps our support to  diagnose the situation     The menu contains the following dialogs   System  Report  Ports  Status Configuration  LLDP    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 239    Diagnostics 8 1 System    8 1 System    The dialogs in this menu allow you to display the current operating  conditions  to verify that the device configuration conforms to the network  environment and control the behavior of the device upon start up     The menu contains the following dialogs   System Information  Configuration Check  Selftest    8 1 1 System Information    This dialog displays the current operating condition of individual components  in the device  The displayed values are a snapshot  they represent the  operating condition at the time the dialog was loaded to the page     The dialog allows you to search the page for search terms and save them in  HTML format on your PC     Buttons   Button Meaning   Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Search Opens the  Search  dialog  The dialog allows you to search the log file for  search terms or regular expressions    Save Opens the  Save  dialog  The dialog allows you to save the log file in  HTML format on your PC    Help Opens the online help     Table 215  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  240 Release 2 0 02 2013    Diagnostics 8 1 System    8 1 2 Confi
157. e information and  downloads on the product pages of the Hirschmann website     RM GUI RSPS  318 Release 2 0 02 2013    Appendix A 7 Literature references    A 7 Literature references     Optische Ubertragungstechnik   in industrieller Praxis      Christoph Wrobel  Hrsg     Huthig Buch Verlag Heidelberg   ISBN 3 7785 2262 0   Hirschmann Manual      Basics of Industrial ETHERNET and TCP IP      280 710 834      TCP IP Illustrated     Vol  1   W R  Stevens   Addison Wesley 1994   ISBN 0 201 63346 9   Hirschmann    Installation    user manual   Hirschmann    Basic Configuration    user manual  Hirschmann    Redundancy Configuration    user manual  Hirschmann    Routing Configuration    user manual  Hirschmann    GUI Graphical User Interface    reference manual  Hirschmann    Command Line Interface    reference manual    Hirschmann User Guide    Industry Protocol       Hirschmann Manual    Network Management System Industrial HiVision       RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 319    Appendix A 8 Copyright of Integrated Software    A 8 Copyright of Integrated  Software    A 8 1 lighttpd    Copyright  c  2004  Jan Kneschke  incremental  All rights reserved     Redistribution and use in source and binary forms  with or without  modification  are permitted provided that the following conditions are met         Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice  this  list of conditions and the following disclaimer         Redistributions in binary form must reproduce 
158. e operating modes actually available depend on the corresponding  media module     Table 32  Table in the Basic Settings Port Configuration dialog   section   x3c   tblsheetnum gt  of 4     56    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Basic Settings    Parameters    Link Current  Settings    Manual Cable  Crossing  Auto   Conf  off     1 6 Port Configuration    Meaning  Displays the currently set operating mode of the device port     Possible values    No cable connected  no link   10 Mbit s HDX  Half duplex connection  10 Mbit s FDX  Full duplex connection  100 Mbit s HDX  Half duplex connection  100 Mbit s FDX  Full duplex connection  1000 Mbit s FDX  Full duplex connection    Defines the devices connected to a TP port   Prerequisite  The automatic configuration of the device port is deactivated              Possible values   mdi  The device switches the send and receive line pairs at the device port   mdix  default setting on TP ports   The device does not switch any line pairs at the device port   auto mdix  The device detects the send and receive line pairs of the connected  device and automatically adapts to them   Example  When you connect a terminal device with a crossed cable   the device automatically resets the port from MDIX to MDI   unsupported  default setting on optical ports or TP SFP ports   The device port does not support this function     Table 32  Table in the Basic Settings Port Configuration dialog   section   x3c   tblsheetnum gt  of 4     RM GUI RSPS  Re
159. e port to which the table entry relates     Table 130  Table in the  Ingress  tab of the switching Rate Limiter dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 155    Switching    Parameters  Threshold    Threshold Unit    Broadcast Mode    Multicast Mode    Unknown Unicast  Mode    5 2 Rate Limiter    Meaning    Defines the threshold value for Broadcast  Multicast and Unicast traffic on  this port     Possible values   0  24414 at 100 MBit s  0  244140 at 1000 MBit s  default setting  0   The value 0 deactivates the rate limiter function on this port   O Enter a percentage between 0 and 100 if the value percent is  selected in the  Threshold Unit  column   O Enter an absolute value for the data rate if the value pps is  selected in the  Threshold Unit  column   The rate limiter function calculates the threshold based on data  packets sized 512 bytes     Defines the unit for the threshold value                          Possible values    percent  default setting    The threshold value is entered as a percentage of the data rate of the   port    pps   The threshold value is entered in data packets per second   Activates deactivates the rate limiter function for received Broadcast data  packets     Possible values   Not selected  default setting   Selected    If the threshold value is exceeded  the device discards the excess  Broadcast data packets on this port     Activates deactivates the rate limiter function for received Multicast data  packets     Possible values   Not selected
160. e root bridge   alternate  Device port with the alternative path to the root bridge  currently  interrupted    designated  Device port for the side of the tree averted from the root bridge   backup  Device port receives STP BPDUs from its own device   disabled  The device port is switched off  See the Basic Settings Port  Configuration dialog     Port Path Cost Defines the path cost of the device port        Possible values   0  200000000  default setting  0     If the value is 0  the device automatically calculates the path costs  depending on the data rate of the device port     Port Priority Defines the priority of the device port     Possible values   16  240 in steps of 16  default setting  128     This value represents the first 4 bits of the port ID     Received Bridge ID Shows the bridge ID of the device from which this device port last received  an STP BPDU     Possible values   For device ports with the designated role  the device displays the  information for the STP BPDU last received by the port  This helps to  diagnose the possible STP problems in the network   For the alternate  backup  master and root port roles  in the  stationary condition  static topology  this information is identical to the  information of the designated port role   If a device port has no connection  or if it has not received any STP   BDPUs yet  the device displays the values that the device port would  send with the designated role        Table 212  CIST  tab page in the Redundancy  Sp
161. e still available in the  Banner Text  field     Possible values   512  0    Table 89   Banner Text  frame in the Security  Pre login Banner dialog    Buttons    Button  Set    Reload    Help    Table 90  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013       Meaning    Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save      Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device     Opens the online help     109    Security 2 6 Pre login Banner    RM GUI RSPS  110 Release 2 0 02 2013    Time    3 Time    The device allows you to synchronize the system time in the device and in  the network with SNTP  Simple Network Time Protocol  and PTP  Precision  Time Protocol   PTP is significantly more accurate than SNTP  If both  protocols are activated in the device  PTP has priority     The device is equipped with a buffered hardware clock  This clock maintains  the correct time if the power supply fails or you disconnect the device from  the power supply  After the device is started  the current time is available to  you  e g  for log entries     The hardware clock bridges a power supply downtime of 3 hours  The  prerequisite is that the power supply of the device has been connected  continually for at least 5 minutes beforehand     The menu contains the following dialogs   Basic Settings  SNTP  PIP    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02
162. e values   emergency  alert  Critical  error  warning  default setting   notice  informational  debug          Table 223   Buffered Logging  frame in the Diagnostics Report Global dialog    SNMP logging    Parameters    Log SNMP Get  Request    Log SNMP Set  Request    Meaning   When the function is switched on  the device logs an event for the syslog  for SNMP Get Requests    You define the severity for this event in the  Severity Get Request  field     Possible values   On  Off  default setting   When the function is switched on  the device logs an event for the syslog  for SNMP Set Requests   You define the severity for this event in the  Severity Set Request  field              Possible values   On  off  default setting              Table 224  SNMP Logging  frame in the Diagnostics Report Global dialog    248    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Diagnostics    Parameters    Severity Get  Request    Severity Set  Request    8 2 Report    Meaning    Defines the severity of the event that the device logs for SNMP Get  Requests     Possible values   emergency  alert  critical  error  warning  notice  default setting   informational  debug  Defines the severity of the event that the device logs for SNMP Set  Requests           Possible values   emergency  alert  critical  error  warning  notice  default setting   informational  debug          Table 224  SNMP Logging  frame in the Diagnostics Report Globa1l dialog  cont      When you activate the logging of SNMP requests  the
163. eceive a query data packet  the device removes the  port from the list of ports with connected Multicast routers   You can only configure this parameter if the port belongs to an existing  VLAN              Possible values     3600  default setting  260   The value 0 means an unlimited timeout   no expiration time     Table 140  VLAN  tab in the switching  IGMP IGMP Snooping dialog  cont      Buttons    Button  Set    Reload    Help    Table 141  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS    Release 2 0 02 2013    Meaning   Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save      Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device     Opens the online help     167    Switching    5 4 2    5 4 IGMP    IGMP Snooping Enhancements    With this dialog you can select a port for a VLAN ID and configure this port     Table    Parameters  VLAN ID    Port    Meaning  Shows the ID of the VLAN to which the table entry applies     Possible values     1  4042  VLAN IDs that are set up     Shows for every VLAN set up in the device whether the relevant device  port is a query port  Additionally  the field shows whether the device  transmits all the Multicast streams in the VLAN to this port     Possible values     The port is not a query port in this VLAN    A   Automatic   The device has detected the port as a query port  A prerequisite is that  the
164. ed    Shows in ascending order the VLAN ID and MAC address of the senders  automatically recorded on this port  The device transmits data packets  from these senders when it receives the data packets on this port     You specify the upper limit for the number of entries in the table   Dynamic  Limit  field     The   lt   and   lt  lt   buttons allow you to transfer entries from this  field into the  Static Addresses  field  In this way  you connect relevant  sender with the port     Table 80  Wizard in the Ssecurity Port Security dialog   Addresses  page  cont      Button  Back  Next  Finish    Table 81  Buttons    100    Meaning   Displays the previous page again  Changes are lost   Saves the changes and opens the next page    Saves the changes and completes the configuration     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Security 2 4 Port Security    Button Meaning  Cancel Closes the Wizard  Changes are lost     Table 81  Buttons  cont    After closing the Wizard  click  Set  to save your settings   Note  The device stores the senders connected with the port until you    deactivate the checking of the sender on the relevant port or in the   Operation  frame     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 101    Security 2 5 RADIUS    2 5 RADIUS    With its factory settings  the device authenticates users based on the local  user management  However  as the size of a network increases  it becomes  more difficult to keep the login data of the users consistent across the  devices     RADIUS  Re
165. ed  voice traffic   vlan dotlp priority  The port filters Voice VLAN data packets based on vian and dot1p  priority tagging   untagged  The port filters data packets without a Voice VLAN tag   vlan  The port filters Voice VLAN data packets based on vlan tagging   dotlp  The port filters Voice VLAN data packets based on dotip tagging   Configure the  Priority  value when using this option   Defines the trust mode for data traffic on the port   The device uses this mode for data traffic on the Voice VLAN  when co   locating a VoIP phone and PC and both use the same cable to transmit  data     Possible values   trust  default setting   This setting allows the data traffic to run at a normal priority with voice  traffic present on the interface   untrust  With voice traffic present and the  Voice VLAN Mode  set to dotip   priority  data traffic uses priority 0  When the interface forwards  data traffic exclusively  the data traffic uses the normal priority     Shows the status of the Voice VLAN on the port        Possible values   enabled  disabled  Defines the ID of the VLAN to which the table entry applies   To forward traffic to this VLAN ID using this filter  set the  Voice VLAN  Mode  to vlan     Possible values   1  4042  VLAN IDs that are set up        Table 164  Table in the switching  VLAN  Voice dialog    186       RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Switching 5 5 VLAN    Parameters Meaning  Priority Defines the port Voice VLAN Priority if the Voice Vlan Mode is dot 1p 
166. elease 2 0 02 2013    Time 3 2 SNTP    3 2 2 Server    With this dialog you can define the settings with which the device operates  as an SNTP server     The SNTP server provides the Universal Time Coordinated  UTC  without  considering local time differences     If the configuration is such  the SNTP server operates in Broadcast mode  In  Broadcast mode  the SNTP server automatically sends Broadcast messages  or Multicast messages according to the Broadcast send interval     Operation  Parameters Meaning  Operation When the function is switched on  the device operates as an SNTP Server     Possible values   On  Off  default setting              Note the setting in the  Disable Server at local Time Source  checkbox in  the  Configuration  frame     Table 102  Operation  frame in the Time  SNTP  Server dialog    Configuration    Parameters Meaning    Listen UDP Port Defines the number of the UDP port on which the SNTP server of the  device receives requests from other clients     Possible values   1  65535  default setting  123   Exception  Port 2222 is reserved for internal functions     Table 103  Configuration  frame in the Time  SNTP Server dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 123    Time    Parameters    Broadcast  Admin Mode    Broadcast  Destination  Address    Broadcast Port    Broadcast VLAN ID    Broadcast Send  Interval  s     Disable Server at  local Time Source    3 2 SNTP    Meaning  Activates deactivates the Broadcast mode   Selected  The SNTP server repli
167. elp     Table 19  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  36 Release 2 0 02 2013    Basic Settings 1 3 Software    1 3 Software    This dialog allows you to update the device software and display information  about the device software     Version  Parameters Meaning  Stored Version Shows the version number and creation date of the device software stored  in the flash memory  The device loads the device software during the next  restart   Export Exports the  Stored Version  of the device software and saves it as an    image file on your PC     Running Version Shows the version number and creation date of the device software that  the device loaded during the last restart and is currently running     Bootcode Shows the version number and creation date of the boot code     Table 20   Version  frame in the Basic Settings Software dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 37    Basic Settings    1 3 Software    Software Update    Parameters  File    Update    Meaning  Defines the path and the file name of the image file with which you update  the device software     The device gives you the following options for updating the device  software    File upload   If the file is located on your PC or on a network drive  click       and   select the file there    TFTP upload   If the file is located on a TFTP server  enter the URL for the file in the   following form    tftp    lt IP address gt   lt path gt   lt file name gt    SCP or SFTP upload   If the file is located on an SCP or SFTP server  enter
168. elp    2 5 RADIUS    Meaning    Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device     Adds a new table entry   Removes the selected table entry   Opens the online help     Table 85  Buttons  cont      2 5 3 Authentication Statistics    This dialog shows information about the communication between the device  and the authentication server  The table shows the information for each  server in a separate row     To delete the statistics  click Clear RADIUS Statistics      inthe           Security RADIUS Global  dialog     Table    Parameters  Name   Address   Round Trip Time    Access Requests    Retransmitted  Access Request  Packets    Access Accepts    Access Rejects    Meaning  Shows the name of the server   Shows the IP address of the server     Shows the time interval in hundredths of a second between the last  response received from the server  Access Reply Access Challenge  and  the corresponding data packet sent  Access Request      Shows the number of access data packets that the device sent to the  server  This value does not take repetitions into account    Shows the number of access data packets that the device retransmitted to  the server     Shows the number of access accept data packets that the device received  from the server   Shows the number of access reject data packets that the device received  from the server     Table 86   RADIUS Authentication Statistics  dialog  table    106    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013
169. emory the device stores the settings for the current  operation   NVM  non volatile memory of the device   From the non volatile memory the device loads the  Selected   configuration profile during a restart or when applying the function   Undo Modification of Configuration    The non volatile memory provides space for multiple configuration  profiles  depending on the number of settings saved in the  configuration profile   The device manages a maximum of 20 configuration profiles in the  non volatile memory   If you select a configuration profile in the table and click  Activate   the  device loads this configuration profile to the volatile memory  RAM    ENVM  external memory   On the external memory the device saves a backup copy of the   Selected  configuration profile   The prerequisite for this is that checkmark is selected in the  Auto   save config on ENVM  field in the Basic Settings External Memory  dialog    Name Shows the name of the configuration profile     Possible values   running config  Name of the e profile in the volatile memory  RAM    config  Name of the factory setting configuration profile in the non volatile  memory  NVM     User defined name   The device allows you to save a configuration profile with a user   defined name by selected an existing configuration profile in the table  and clicking  Save As         Modification Date Shows the time at which a user last saved the configuration profile           Table 28  Table in the Basic Settings  Load 
170. en permission  please contact  openssl core openssl org     5  Products derived from this software may not be called  OpenSSL   nor may  OpenSSL  appear in their names without prior written  permission of the OpenSSL Project     6  Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following  acknowledgment    This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project  for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit  http   www openssl org                                                                                  THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT    AS IS      AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES  INCLUDING  BUT    NOT LIMITED TO  THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY    AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED      IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS     CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT  INDIRECT      INCIDENTAL  SPECIAL  EXEMPLARY  OR CONSEQUENTIAL    RM GUI RSPS  334 Release 2 0 02 2013    Appendix A 8 Copyright of Integrated Software      DAMAGES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED TO  PROCUREMENT OF    SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES  LOSS OF USE  DATA  OR     PROFITS  OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION  HOWEVER CAUSED AND    ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY  WHETHER IN CONTRACT  STRICT    LIABILITY  OR TORT  INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE      ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE  EVEN      This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young     eay cryptsoft com   This product includes software written by Tim    Hudson 
171. ent error occurs        Possible values   reboot  default setting   The device triggers a cold reset   logOnly  The device logs the error in the log file  system log    sendTrap  The device sends an SNMP message  trap    The prerequisite for sending SNMP messages  traps  is that the  function is switched on in the Diagnostics Status  Configuration Alarms  Traps  dialog and atleast 1 SNMP manager  is defined     Table 220  Table in the Diagnostics System Selftest dialog    RM GUI RSPS  244 Release 2 0 02 2013    Diagnostics 8 1 System    Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Help Opens the online help     Table 221  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 245    Diagnostics 8 2 Report    8 2 Report    The device allows you to log user actions and device specific events  In this  menu you configure the logging settings for the device  You also have the  option to view the reports     The menu contains the following dialogs   Global  Syslog  Persistent Logging  Hardware State  System Log  Audit Trail    RM GUI RSPS  246 Release 2 0 02 2013    Diagnostics 8 2 Report    8 2 1 Global    The device allows you to log specific events using the following outputs   on the console  on one or more syslog servers  o
172. er interface    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    11    Key    RM GUI RSPS  12 Release 2 0 02 2013    Graphical User Interface    Graphical User Interface    System requirements   To open the graphical user interface  you need a Web browser  for  example Mozilla Firefox version 3 5 or later  or Microsoft Internet Explorer  version 6 or later     Installation    Note  The graphical user interface uses Java 6 or Java 7     Install the software from the enclosed CD ROM  To do this  you go to     Additional Software     select Java Runtime Environment and click on     Installation        RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 13    Graphical User Interface    E Starting the graphical user interface  The prerequisite for starting the graphical user interface  first configure  the IP parameters of the device correctly  The    Basic Configuration    user  manual contains detailed information that you need to define the IP  parameters     C Start your Web browser    O Activate Java in the security settings of your Web browser    CI Write the IP address of the device in the address field of the Web  browser  Use the following form  https    xxx xxx xXxxX XXX    The Web browser sets up the connection to the device and shows the  login window      Rh  HIRSCHMANN       Rail Switch Power Smart    Software Version  HiOS 2S 02 0 00    Login user Dee    Password  Language English Pe         Figure 1  Login window    C Select the user name and enter the password    C Select the language in which 
173. erature thresholds in the Basic Settings System  dialog  in the  Temperature    C   field     Ring Redundancy Defines whether the device monitors the ring redundancy     Possible values    Ignore  default setting    The device ignores this parameter    Monitor   The device changes the device status to Error in the following   situations        The redundancy function becomes active  loss of redundancy  reserve        The device is a normal ring participant and detects an error in the  local configuration           Table 271  Monitoring  frame in the Diagnostics Status Configuration Device  Status dialog    RM GUI RSPS  282 Release 2 0 02 2013    Diagnostics 8 4 Status Configuration    Parameters Meaning  Connection error Defines whether the device monitors the link status of the device ports     Possible values    Ignore  default setting   The device ignores this parameter   Monitor  The device changes the device status to Error if the link at a device  port is interrupted   You have the option of selecting the device ports to be monitored  individually    ENVM removal Defines whether the device monitors the active external memory           Possible values   Ignore  default setting   The device ignores this parameter   Monitor  The device changes the device status to Error if you remove the  active external memory from the device   ENVM notin Sync Defines whether the device monitors the synchronization of the device  configuration in the device and on the external memory     
174. erver does not reply  the device sends its  requests to the SNTP server configured in the next table entry     If none of the configured SNTP servers responds in the meantime  the  SNTP client loses its synchronization  The device cyclically sends  requests to each SNTP server until a server delivers a valid time  The  device synchronizes itself with this SNTP server  even if the other servers  can be reached again later     Specifies the name of the SNTP server     Possible values   1  32 alphanumeric characters    Specifies the IP address of the SNTP server     Possible values    Valid IPv4 address  default setting  0 0 0 0   Defines the UDP Port on which the SNTP server expects the time  information     Possible values   1  65535  default setting  123   Exception  Port 2222 is reserved for internal functions     Table 100  Table in the Time  SNTP Client dialog    120    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Time    Parameters  Status    Active    3 2 SNTP    Meaning  Shows the connection status between the SNTP client and the SNTP  server     Possible values     SUCCESS  The device has successfully synchronized the time with the SNTP  server   badDateEncoded  The time information received contains protocol errors    synchronization failed   other      The value 0 0 0 0 is entered for the IP address of the SNTP   server   synchronization failed    or      The SNTP client is using a different SNTP server   requestTimedoOut  The device has not received a reply from the SNTP ser
175. es   In the process  the device switches off the HTTPS server     Table 55   Certificate  frame in the securi ty Management Access Server dialog    HTTPS  tab page    Note  In the Web browser  a warning appears when you are loading the  graphical user interface if you are using a certificate that has not been  verified by a certifying organization  To load the graphical user interface   add an exception rule for the certificate in the Web browser     RM GUI RSPS    Release 2 0 02 2013    81    Security    2 3 Management Access    Certificate Import    Parameters  URL    Import    Meaning  Defines the path and file name of the certificate   X 509 certificates  PEM  are permitted     The device gives you the following options for copying the certificate to the  device    File upload   If the certificate is on your PC or on a network drive  click       and   select the file that contains the signature key    TFTP upload   If the certificate is on a TFTP server  enter the URL for the file in the   following form  tftp    lt IP address gt   lt path gt   lt file name gt     SCP or SFTP upload   If the certificate is on an SCP or SFTP server  you enter the URL for   the file in the following form        scp   orsftp    lt IP address gt   lt path gt   lt file name gt   When you click  Import      the device displays the   Authentication  window  There you enter the  User  and   Password  to login to the server        scp   orsftp    lt user gt   lt password gt   lt IP  address gt   l
176. es the BPDU even if the TCN  guard is switched on  Example  The device receives better path  information for the root bridge        Table 213   Guards  tab page in the Redundancy  Spanning Tree  Port dialog  section   x3c  tblsheetnum gt  of 3     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 235    Redundancy    Parameters    Loop Guard    Loop State    Trans  into Loop    Trans  out of Loop    7 4 Spanning Tree    Meaning   Switches the monitoring of loops on off on the device port  With this setting  the device prevents loops if the device port does not receive any more  STP BPDUs  Only use this setting for device ports with the STP role  alternate  backup or root     Possible values    Not selected  default setting    The monitoring of loops is switched off    If the device port does not receive any STP BPDUs for a while  the   device sets the state of the port to the value forwarding    Selected   The monitoring of loops is switched on  This prevents loops e g  if you   switch off the Spanning Tree function on the remote device or if the   connection is only interrupted in the receiving direction        Ifthe device port does not receive any STP BPDUs for a while  the  device sets the state of the port to the value discarding and the  value in the  Loop State  field to true        Ifthe device port then receives STP BPDUs again  the device sets  the state of the port to a value according to the port role and the  value in the  Loop State  field to false           If you switch on the
177. es to requests from SNTP clients in Unicast  mode and also sends SNTP packets in Broadcast mode as  Broadcasts or Multicasts   Not selected  default setting   The SNTP server replies to requests from SNTP clients in the Unicast  mode   Defines the IP address to which the SNTP server of the device sends the  SNTP packets in Broadcast mode     Possible values   Valid IPv4 address  default setting  0 0 0 0     Broadcast and Multicast addresses are permitted     Defines the number of the UDP port at which the SNTP server sends the  SNTP packets in Broadcast mode     Possible values    1  65535  default setting  123    Exception  Port 2222 is reserved for internal functions   Defines the ID of the VLAN in which the SNTP server of the device sends  the SNTP packets in Broadcast mode     Possible values   0   4042  default setting  1     If you set the value to 0  the SNTP server of the device sends the SNTP  packets in the same VLAN in which the management functions of the  device can be accessed  See the Basic Settings Network dialog     Defines the time interval at which the SNTP server of the device sends  SNTP broadcast packets     Possible values   64  1024  default setting  128     Defines whether the device disables the SNTP Broadcast server when it  is synchronized to the local clock     Possible values   Selected  The device disables the SNTP Broadcast server when it is  synchronized to the local clock  The SNTP server continues to reply  to requests from SNTP clients  In 
178. esired senders  In the device these addresses are known as  Static  Addresses      To keep the setup process as simple as possible  the device allows you to  record the desired senders automatically  The device    learns    the senders by  evaluating the received data packets  In the device these addresses are  known as  Dynamic Addresses   When a user defined upper limit has been  reached   Dynamic Limit    the device stops the    learning    on the relevant  port and only transmits the data packets of the senders already recorded   When you adjust the upper limit to the number of expected senders  you thus  make MAC Flooding attacks more difficult     Note  With the automatic recording of the  Dynamic Addresses   the device  always discards the 1st data packet from unknown senders  Using this 1st  data packet  the device checks whether the upper limit has been reached   The device records the sender until the upper limit is reached  Afterwards   the device transmits data packets that it receives on the relevant port from  this sender     RM GUI RSPS  96 Release 2 0 02 2013    Security 2 4 Port Security    Operation    Parameters Meaning  Operation When this function is switched on  the device checks the VLAN ID and  MAC address of the sender before it transmits a data packet     Possible values   On  The device only transmits a received data packet if its sender is  desired on the relevant device port  Also activate the checking of the  sender on the relevant device ports  
179. ess of the node    Shows the time between received first packets for this node on LAN A   When the counter threshold reaches 497 days  it restarts from 0   Shows the time between received first packets for this node on LAN B   When the counter threshold reaches 497 days  it restarts from 0   Shows the type of node     Possible values   RedBoxp  Management  vdanp  Client    Table 188  Table in the Redundancy  PRP  DAN VDAN Table dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    211    Redundancy 7 2 PRP    Buttons  Button Meaning  Delete Deletes the entire table   Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device   Help Opens the online help     Table 189  Buttons    7 2 3 Proxy Node Table    This dialog informs you of the connected devices for which this device  provides PRP redundancy     Table  Parameters Meaning  Index Shows a sequential number to which the table entry relates   The device automatically defines this number   Possible values   0  128  MAC Address Shows the MAC address of the connected devices for which this device    implements PRP redundancy     Table 190  Table in the Redundancy  PRP  Proxy Node Table dialog    Buttons  Button Meaning  Delete Deletes the entire table     Table 191  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  212 Release 2 0 02 2013    Redundancy 7 2 PRP    Button Meaning   Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Help Opens the online help     Table 
180. etects the following scan types   Null scan  Xmas scan  SYN FIN scan    RM GUI RSPS  146 Release 2 0 02 2013    Network Security 4 1 DoS    TCP offset protection  TCP SYN protection  L4 port protection  Minimal header scan    Parameter Meaning  Activate Null Scan Activates or deactivates the null scan   Filter    Possible values   Selected  The device detects ingress data packets with no TCP flags set and  TCP sequence number reset to 0 and discards these   Not selected  default setting   The null scan is deactivated     Activate Xmas Filter Activates or deactivates the Xman scan     Possible values   Selected  The device detects ingress data packets with the TCP flags FIN  URG  and PUSH set simultaneously and TCP sequence number reset to 0  and discards these   Not selected  default setting   The Xmas scan is deactivated     Activate SYN FIN Activates or deactivates the SYN FIN scan     Filter  Possible values     Selected   The device detects ingress data packets with the TCP flags SYN and  FIN set simultaneously and discards these    Not selected  default setting    The SYN FIN scan is deactivated     Activate TCP Offset Activates or deactivates the TCP offset scan     Protection f  Possible values     Selected   The device detects ingress TCP packets having Fragment Offset field  of IP header equal 1 and discards these    The device accepts UDP and ICMP packets having Fragment Offset  field of IP header equal 1    Not selected  default setting    The TCP offset scan is de
181. eters  MAC Address    Add    Static Addresses    Remove   lt      lt  lt     Dynamic Addresses    2 4 Port Security    Meaning  Specifies the MAC address of the desired sender     Possible values   Valid Unicast MAC address  Enter the value in one of the following formats       without a separator  e g  001122334455      separated by spaces  e g  00 11 22 33 44 55      separated by colons  e g  00 11 22 33 44 55      separated by hyphens  e g  00 11 22 33 44 55      separated by points  e g  00 11 22 33 44 55      separated by points after every 4th character  e g    0011 2233 4455    Click  Add  to transfer the VLAN ID and the MAC address to the  Static  Addresses  field     Transfers the values specified in the  VLAN ID  and  MAC Address  fields  to the  Static Addresses  field     Shows the VLAN ID and MAC address of desired senders connected to  the port           The device uses this field to show the number of senders connected to the  port and the upper limit  You specify the upper limit for the number of  entries in the table   Static Limit  field    Removes the entries selected in the  Static Addresses  field    Moves the entries selected in the  Dynamic Addresses  field to the  Static  Addresses  field    Moves every entry from the  Dynamic Addresses  field to the  Static  Addresses  field     If the  Dynamic Addresses  field contains more entries than are allowed in  the  Static Addresses  field  the device moves the foremost entries until  the upper limit is reach
182. evant field     Possible values   1  16 alphanumeric characters    You get the password from the administrator of the authentication server   Specifies the authentication server as primary or secondary     Possible values   Selected  The server is specified as the primary authentication server  The  device sends the login data for authenticating the users to this  authentication server   If you select multiple servers  the device specifies the last server  selected as the primary authentication server   Not selected  default setting   The server is specified as the secondary authentication server  The  device sends the login data to the secondary authentication server if  it does not receive a response from the primary authentication server     Activates deactivates the connection to the server     Possible values   Selected  The connection is active  The device sends the login data for  authenticating the users to this server if the preconditions named  above are fulfilled   Not selected  The connection is inactive  The device does not send any login data  to this server     Table 84  Table in the Security RADIUS Authentication Server dialog  cont      Buttons    Button  Set    Table 85  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS    Release 2 0 02 2013    Meaning    Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings Load Save dialog and click  Save      105    Security    Button  Reload    Create  Remove  H
183. evice  port    When the counter reaches the value specified here  the device port  stops sending any more BPDUs  On the one hand  this reduces the load  generated by RSTP  and on the other a loop may be caused when  BPDUs are not received     The device decrements the counter by 1 every second  In the following    second  the device sends a maximum of 1 new BPDU     Table 208   Protocol Configuration Information  frame   Bridge  column  in the  Redundancy  Spanning Tree Global dialog  section  x3c  tblsheetnum gt     of 3     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013       227    Redundancy 7 4 Spanning Tree    Parameters Meaning    BPDU Guard Switches the BPDU Guard function in the device on off   With this function  the device helps protect your network from incorrect  configurations  attacks with STP BPDUs  and undesired topology  changes     Possible values    Not selected  default setting    The BPDU Guard function is switched off    selected   The BPDU Guard function is switched on        The device activates the function for manually defined edge  ports  terminal device ports   On the  CIST  tab page  the  checkbox in the  Admin Edge Port  column is Selected for  these device ports        If an edge port receives an STP BPDU  the device deactivates  the device port  In the Basic Configuration  Port  Configuration dialog  the checkbox in the  Port on  column is  Not selected for this device port        To reset the status of the device port to the value forwarding  you  proceed 
184. ff the Spanning Tree function on  the device ports that are participating in other redundancy protocols   Otherwise the redundancy may operate differently to the way intended   This can cause loops     Parameters Meaning  Port Shows the number of the device port to which the table entry relates   Stp active Switches the Spanning Tree function on off on the device port     Possible values   Selected  default setting   Not selected    If the Spanning Tree is activated in the device and switched off on the  device port  the port does not send STP BPDUs and drops any STP   BPDUs received     Port State Shows the transmission state of the device port     Possible values   discarding  The device port is blocked and only forwards STP BPDUs   learning  The device port is blocked  but it learns the MAC addresses of  received data packets   forwarding  The device port forwards data packets   disabled  The device port is switched off  See the Basic Settings Port  Configuration dialog   manualFwd  The Spanning Tree function is switched off on the device port  The  device port forwards STP BPDUs   notParticipate  The device port is not participating in STP        Table 212  CIST  tab page in the Redundancy Spanning Tree Port dialog  section   x3c  tblsheetnum gt  of 4     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 231    Redundancy 7 4 Spanning Tree    Parameters Meaning  Port Role Shows the current role of the device port in CIST     Possible values   root  Device port with the cheapest path to th
185. g allows you to define basic settings with which you access the  device management via the network     Management interface    This frame allows you to define the following settings   The source from which the device management receives its IP  parameters  VLAN in which the management can be accessed    Parameters Meaning  IP Address Defines the source from which the device receives its IP parameters after  Assignment starting     Possible values    BOOTP   The device receives its IP parameters from a BOOTP or DHCP server   The server evaluates the MAC address of the device  then assigns the  IP parameters    DHCP  default setting    The device receives its IP parameters from a DHCP server    The server evaluates the MAC address  the DHCP name  or other  parameters of the device  then assigns the IP parameters    Local   The device uses the IP parameters from the internal memory  You  define the settings for this in the  IP Parameter  frame        Note  If there is no response from the BOOTP or DHCP server  the device  sets the IP address to 0 0 0 0 and makes another attempt to obtain a valid  IP address     VLAN ID Defines the ID of the VLAN in which the device management can be  accessed via the network     Possible values   1  4042  default setting  1     You can only access the management via the network via device ports  that are members of this VLAN  You can see which VLAN a device port is  assigned to in the Switching VLAN  Current dialog     MAC Address Displays the M
186. g as a ring manager     Possible values   off  default setting    Device is operating as a ring client   On    Device is operating as a ring manager              If there is exactly one device at the ends of the line  you activate this  function     Activate deactivate the advanced mode for fast switching times     Possible values    Selected  default setting    Advanced mode switched on    MRP capable Hirschmann devices support this mode    Not selected   Advanced mode switched off    Select this setting if another device in the ring does not support this   mode   Defines the max  delay time in milliseconds for the reconfiguration of the  ring  This setting is only effective if the device is working as a ring  manager     Possible values   500ms  200ms  default setting   30ms  10ms    The delay times 30ms and 10ms are only available to you for devices with  hardware for enhanced redundancy functions  In order to use these delay  times  load the Fast MRP device software  HiOS 2S xxx RSPS   02000 bin where xxx MRP   The device software you load with the  Basic Settings Software dialog     Configure the delay time to 10ms  when you use up to 50 devices in the  ring  that support this delay time  When you use more than 50 of these  devices in the ring  configure a delay time to at least 30ms     Shorter delay times make greater demands on the response time of every  individual device in the ring  Only use values lower than 500ms if the other  devices in the ring also support thi
187. g of the log entries in the log file   Indicates the alarm status for the utilization     Possible values   Selected  The utilization of the device port is below the value defined in the   Lower Threshold      field or above the value defined in the  Upper  Threshold      field  The device sends an SNMP message  trap    Not selected  The utilization of the device port is above the value defined in the   Lower Threshold      field or below the value defined in the  Upper  Threshold      field     The prerequisite for sending SNMP messages  traps  is that the  function is switched on in the Diagnostics Alarms  Traps  dialog and  at least 1 SNMP manager is defined     Table 251  Table in the Diagnostics  Ports Utilization dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013       267    Diagnostics 8 3 Ports    Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Help Opens the online help     Table 252  Buttons    8 3 3 SFP    This dialog allows you to look at the SFP transceivers currently connected to  the device and their properties     Table    The table only displays valid values if the device is equipped with SFP  transceivers     Parameters Meaning   Port Shows the number of the device port to which the table entry relates   
188. gement dialog   radius   The device authenticates the users with a RADIUS server in the  network  You specify the RADIUS server in the  Security RADIUS Authentication Server dialog    reject   The device rejects the authentication request from the user     Table 42   New Entry  frame in the Security Authentication List dialog    RM GUI RSPS  70 Release 2 0 02 2013    Security    Parameters  Active    2 2 Authentication List    Meaning  Activates deactivates the list     Possible values     Selected   The list is activated  The device uses the policies in this list when  users access the device with the relevant application    Not selected   The list is deactivated     Table 42   New Entry  frame in the Security Authentication List dialog  cont      Allocate Applications    In this frame you specify the accesses for which the device uses the  selected list  For example  to only use the list for accesses via the V 24  interface  you assign the Console  V 24  application     To display the frame  you click the  Allocate Applications  button     Parameters    Description    Possible Applications This column contains the applications that can be allocated to the    Dedicated  Applications    Table 43     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    selected list     Possible values     Console  V 24    for accessing the management via the V 24 interface   SSH   for accessing the management via SSH   Telnet   for accessing the management via Telnet   Web Interface   for accessing the manage
189. ges     The prerequisite for sending SNMP messages  traps  is that the function  is switched on in the Diagnostics Status Configuration Alarms  Traps   dialog and at least 1 SNMP manager is defined    Defines the waiting time in seconds that the device waits after sending an  SNMP message  trap  before sending the next SNMP message     Possible values   0   3600  default setting  0     The value 0 deactivates the waiting time     Specifies the upper limit for the number of automatically recorded senders    Dynamic Addresses    When the upper limit has been reached  the  device stops the    learning    on this port     Adjust the value to the number of expected senders     Possible values   0   600  default setting  600     The value 0 deactivates the automatic recording of the senders on this  port     Specifies the upper limit for the number of senders connected to the port    Static Addresses    The  Wizard  helps you to connect the port with one  or more desired senders     Possible values   0  64  default setting  64     The value 0 prevents you from connecting a sender with the port    Shows the number of automatically recorded senders   Dynamic  Addresses      Shows the number of senders connected to the port   Static Addresses     Shows the VLAN ID and MAC address of an undesired sender whose data  packets the device last discarded on this port     Shows the number of discarded data packets on this device port that  caused the device to send an SNMP message  trap      
190. gs 1 6 Port Configuration    1 6 Port Configuration    With this dialog you can define settings for the individual device ports  The  dialog also shows the operating mode  connection state  bit rate and duplex  mode for every device port     Table    Parameters Meaning  Port Shows the number of the device port to which the table entry relates     Name Name of the device port   Enter the name of your choice     Possible values   0  64 alphanumeric characters    Port on Activates deactivates the device port     Possible values   Selected  default setting   The device port is activated   Not selected  The device port is deactivated  The device port does not send or  receive any data     State Shows whether the device port is currently physically switched on or off     Possible values   Selected  The device port is switched on   Not selected  The device port is switched off   If the  Port on  function is switched on  the  Auto Disable  function has  switched off the device port   You define the settings for the  Auto Disable  function in the  Diagnostics Ports Auto Disable dialog     Table 32  Table in the Basic Settings Port Configuration dialog   section   x3c  tblsheetnum gt  of 4     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 55    Basic Settings    Parameters    Power State   Port off     Auto Power Down    Automatic  Configuration    Manual  Configuration    1 6 Port Configuration    Meaning    Physically switches off the device port  or leaves it on when you deactivate  the  Port on
191. guration Check    The device enables you to compare the device configuration with those of its  neighboring devices  For this purpose  the device uses the information that it  received from its neighboring devices via topology recognition  LLDP      The dialog lists the deviations detected  which affect the performance of the  communication between the device and the recognized neighboring devices     You update the content of the table via the  Load  button  If the table remains  empty  the configuration check was successful and the device configuration  is compatible with the device configuration in the detected neighboring  devices     Summary  Parameters Meaning  Number of Errors Shows the number of errors that the device detected during the    configuration check   Number of Warnings Shows the number of warnings that the device detected during the  configuration check     Amount of Information Shows the amount of information that the device detected during the  configuration check     Table 216   Summary  frame in the Diagnostics System Configuration Check  dialog    You will also find this information in the status bar above the menu     Table    When you select a row in the table  the device displays additional  information in the area beneath it     Parameters Meaning  Rule ID Rule ID of the deviations having occurred  The dialog combines several    deviations with the same rule ID under one rule ID     Table 217  Table in the Diagnostics System Configuration Check di
192. he device synchronizes the frequency of the  Transparent Clock with the PTP master     Possible values   Selected  default setting   The device synchronizes the frequency   Not selected  The frequency remains constant     Synchronize Defines whether the device synchronizes the local system time   local clock  Possible values   Selected  The device synchronizes the local system time with the time received  via PTP     Prerequisite  The  Syntonize  function is activated   Not selected  default setting   The local system time remains constant    Current Master Displays the port identification number  UUID  of the master device on  which the device synchronizes its frequency    If the value contains only zeros  this is because   The  Syntonize  function is deactivated   or  The device cannot find a PTP master    Offset to Master  ns  Shows the measured difference  offset  between the local clock and the  PTP master in nanoseconds  The device calculates the difference from  the time information received    Prerequisite  The  Synchronize local clock  function is activated    Delay to Master  ns  Shows the delay when transmitting the PTP synchronization messages  from the PTP master to the PTP slave in nanoseconds   Prerequisite    The  Synchronize local clock  function is activated   In the  Delay Mechanism  field  the value e2e is selected     Table 119   Local Synchronization  frame in the Time  PTP  Transparent  Clock Globa1 dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 141    Time
193. he device with SNMP version 2     Possible values   Selected  default setting   Access activated   Not selected  Access deactivated     You define the community name in the Security Management  Access SNMPv1 v2 Community dialog     Activates deactivates the access to the device with SNMP version 3     Possible values   Selected  default setting   Access activated   Not selected  Access deactivated     This function is used  for example  by the Industrial HiVision network  management software to make changes to the settings     Table 45   Configuration  frame in the Security Management Access  Server dialog    SNMP  tab page    74    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Security 2 3 Management Access    Parameters Meaning    Port number Defines the number of the UDP port from which the SNMP server receives  requests from clients     Possible values   1  65535  default setting  161   Exception  Port 2222 is reserved for internal functions     To get the server to use the new port after a change  you proceed as  follows    O Click on  Set     O Select the active device configuration in the Basic   Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     O Restart the device    SNMPover802 Activates deactivates the access with SNMP via IEEE 802 networks   enabled       Possible values   not selected  default setting   Access deactivated   selected  Access activated     This function uses  for example  the HiDiscovery software to configure  devices without an IP address     Table 45   Config
194. ick  Reset MAC Address Table  in the Basic  Settings Restart dialog     Create    To set up a filter manually  click the  Create  button     Parameters Meaning  VLAN ID Defines the ID of the VLAN to which the table entry applies     Possible values   All VLAN IDs that are set up    Table 134   Create  window    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 159          Switching 5 3 Filter for MAC addresses  Parameters Meaning  Address Defines the destination MAC address to which the table entry applies   Possible values   Valid MAC address  Enter the value in one of the following formats       without a separator  e g  001122334455      separated by spaces  e g  00 11 22 33 44 55      separated by colons  e g  00 11 22 33 44 55      separated by hyphens  e g  00 11 22 33 44 55      separated by points  e g  00 11 22 33 44 55      separated by points after every 4th character  e g   0011 2233 4455  Possible Ports Defines the device ports to which the device transmits data packets with    the destination MAC address     0O  0O       O    Select one port if the destination MAC address is a Unicast address   Select one or more ports if the destination MAC address is a Multicast  address    Select no port to set up a discard filter  The device discards data  packets with the destination MAC address specified in the table entry     Table 134  Create  window  cont      Edit Entry    To manually adapt the settings for a table entry  click the  Edit Entry     button     Parameters Meaning  Possib
195. identical  source and destination addresses and discards these     Parameter    Activate Land  Attack Filter    Meaning  Activates or deactivates the land attack scan     Possible values   Selected  The device detects and discards ingress IP data packets having  source IP address identical to destination IP address   Not selected  default setting   The land attack scan is deactivated     Table 125  IP  frame in the Network Security DoS Global dialog    148    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Network Security 4 1 DoS    ICMP    This dialog provides you with filter options for the following ICMP  parameters    Fragmented data packets   ICMP packets from a specific size upwards   Broadcast pings    Parameter Meaning  Filter Fragmented Activates or deactivates the filter for fragmented ICMP packets     Packets  Possible values     Selected   The device detects fragmented ICMP packets and discards these    Not selected  default setting    The filter for fragmented ICMP packets is deactivated   Allowed Packet Defines the maximum allowed size of ICMP packets in bytes   Size   Possible values    0  1472   The maximum allowed size of ICMP packets in bytes   512  default setting    The default allowed size of ICMP packets is 512 bytes     Note  Select the  Filter by Packet Size  checkbox if you want the device  to discard incoming data packets whose size exceeds the maximum  allowed size for ICMP packets     Filter by Packet Activates or deactivates the filter for incoming ICMP data
196. ing SNMP messages  traps  is that the function  is switched on in the Diagnostics Status Configuration Alarms  Traps   dialog and at least 1 SNMP manager is defined     Table 16   Configuration  frame in the Basic Settings Network IP Address  Conflict Detection dialog  cont      RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 35    Basic Settings 1 2 Network    Information    Parameters Meaning  Conflict detected Shows whether an address conflict currently exists     Possible values   Selected  The device detects an address conflict   Not selected  default setting   The device does not detect an address conflict     Table 17   Information  frame in the Basic Settings Network IP Address  Conflict Detection dialog    Table   Parameters Meaning   Time Stamp Shows the time at which the device detected an address conflict    Port Shows the number of the device port on which the device detected the  address conflict    IP Address Shows the IP address that is causing the address conflict    MAC Address Shows the MAC address of the device with which the address conflict  exists     Table 18  Table in the Basic Settings Network IP Address Conflict Detection  dialog    Buttons    Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save      Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device   Help Opens the online h
197. intf replacement      Copyright Patrick Powell 1995     This code is based on code written by Patrick Powell      papowell astart com  It may be used for any purpose as long as this    notice remains intact on all source code distributions    RM GUI RSPS  330 Release 2 0 02 2013    Appendix A 8 Copyright of Integrated Software    c  Compatibility code  openbsd compat     Apart from the previously mentioned licenses  various pieces of code in the  openbsd compat  subdirectory are licensed as follows     Some code is licensed under a 3 term BSD license  to the following copyright  holders     Todd C  Miller   Theo de Raadt   Damien Miller   Eric P  Allman   The Regents of the University of California  Constantin S  Svintsoff      Redistribution and use in source and binary forms  with or without     modification  are permitted provided that the following conditions     are met      1  Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright     notice  this list of conditions and the following disclaimer      2  Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright    notice  this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the  documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution     3  Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software  without specific prior written permission                      THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND     
198. ion  Log file    File name  audittrail html    CLICommands txt    defaultconfig xml    runningconfig xml    supportinfo html    systeminfo html  systemlog html    Format  HTML    Text    XML    XML    Text    HTML  HTML    Comments  Chronological  recording of system  events and writing  user actions   Prerequisite  The  Telnet server of the  device is switched  on     Device configuration  with the plant  settings    Device configuration  that the device uses  in the current  operation    Device internal  service information     Table 227  Support Information  Files contained in the ZIP archive    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    251    Diagnostics 8 2 Report    Meaning of the severities for events          Severity Meaning   emergency Device not ready for operation  alert Immediate user intervention required  critical Critical status   error Error status   warning Warning   notice Significant  normal status  informational Informal message   debug Debug message    Table 228  Meaning of the severities for events    8 2 2 Email Logging  Global    The device allows you to configure the following Email Alert features   You configure log messages for an urgent severity level at and above  which the device sends the logs as urgent messages  The device sends  urgent messages immediately to the mail server   You configure log messages for a non urgent severity level at and above  which the device sends the logs as non urgent messages  Furthermore   configure the non severity leve
199. ions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright     notice  this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the     documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution      3  All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software     must display the following acknowledgement       This product includes cryptographic software written by     Eric Young  eay cryptsoft com       The word  cryptographic  can be left out if the rouines from the library     being used are not cryptographic related          4  If you include any Windows specific code  or a derivative thereof  from    the apps directory  application code  you must include an     acknowledgement   This product includes software written     by Tim Hudson  tjh cryptsoft com       THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG    AS IS  AND     ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT   LIMITED TO  THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND    FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED  IN NO     EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE     FOR ANY DIRECT  INDIRECT  INCIDENTAL  SPECIAL  EXEMPLARY    OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED TO     PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES  LOSS OF    USE  DATA  OR PROFITS  OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION  HOWEVER    CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY  WHETHER IN     CONTRACT  STRICT LIABILITY  OR TORT  INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE    OR OTHERWISE  ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS     SOFTWARE 
200. istribution Neither the name of the  copyright holder nor the names of any other contributors may be used to  endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior  written permission  THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT  HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS  AS IS  AND ANY EXPRESS OR  IMPLIED WARRANTIES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED TO  THE  IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA  PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE  COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY  DIRECT  INDIRECT  INCIDENTAL  SPECIAL  EXEMPLARY  OR  CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED TO   PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES  LOSS OF  USE  DATA  OR PROFITS  OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION  HOWEVER  CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY  WHETHER IN  CONTRACT  STRICT LIABILITY  OR TORT  INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE  OR OTHERWISE  ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS  SOFTWARE  EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH  DAMAGE     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 323    Appendix A 8 Copyright of Integrated Software    A 8 5 OpenSSH    The licences which components of this software fall under are as follows   First  we will summarize and say that all components are under a BSD  licence  or a licence more free than that     OpenSSH contains no GPL code     1       Copyright  c  1995 Tatu Ylonen  lt ylo cs hut fi gt   Espoo  Finland    All rights reserved      As far as   am concerned  the code   have written for this software     can be used f
201. ity  Status dialog  section  x3c  tblsheetnum gt  of 4     RM GUI RSPS  288 Release 2 0 02 2013    Diagnostics    Parameters    Unsecure SNMP  Configuration    SysMon active    External NVM  Update possible    8 4 Status Configuration    Meaning  Defines whether the device monitors the status of the SNMP server     Possible values    Ignore   The device ignores this parameter    Monitor  default setting    The device changes the security status to the value Error if at least   one of the following conditions applies        The SNMPv1 on  function is enabled        The SNMPv2 on  function is enabled        The encryption for SNMPv3 is disabled   You configure the encryption in the Security User Management  dialog  in the table in the  SNMP encryption  field           You define the settings for the SNMP server in the Security Management  Access  Server dialog  on the  SNMP  tab page    Defines whether the device monitors the option to switch to the system  monitor     Possible values    Ignore  default setting    The device ignores this parameter    Monitor   The device changes the security status to the value Error if the  access to the system monitor is possible  When the device is being  started  every user can switch to the system monitor via a V 24  connection           You enable disable the system monitor in the Diagnostics Selftest  dialog    Defines whether the device monitors the saving of the device  configuration on the external memory     Possible values    Ignore
202. l  Expand Node     E  F Back  E ta p Forward       Restart  E 8 Security  a  Time  H I Network Security   19  Switching  H E aosiPriority         Redundancy  H 8  Diagnostics  Flr Advanced        A Help        gt    gt        Figure 3  Menu section with context menu    You right click the menu section to open the context menu     Designation  Expand All    Collaps All    Expand Node    Back    Forward    Meaning   Expands the nodes in the menu tree  The menu section shows the  menu items for all levels    Collapses the nodes in the menu tree  The menu section shows the  menu items for the top level    Expands the selected node and collapses the other nodes in the  menu tree  This function allows you to expand a main node without  scrolling and without collapsing other nodes manually    Allows you to quickly jump back to a previously selected menu  item    Allows you to quickly jump forward to a previously selected menu  item when you have previously used the  Back  function     Table 1  Menu section  Functions in the context menu    16    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Graphical User Interface    The status line is located in the top part of the menu section          3  FHE    ly    9       Figure 4  Status line    The status line contains the following buttons     Button Function  Refreshes the status line  The buttons show the values loaded from the volatile     memory  RAM  of the device     o Terminates the refreshing of the status line   When you position the mouse 
203. l to a level below the severity level  The  device stores the non urgent messages in a log buffer then sends the logs  to the server at the configured time interval or when the buffer is full   You classify log messages as urgent and non urgent to decide whether  the device sends email immediately or periodically     RM GUI RSPS  252 Release 2 0 02 2013    Diagnostics 8 2 Report    Operation  Parameters Meaning  Operation Activates deactivates the Email Logging function globally on the device     Possible values   On  Off  default setting              Table 229  Operation  frame in the Diagnostics Report Email Logging Global  dialog       Information    Parameters Meaning    Number of Failed Shows the number of dropped email alerts   Emails    Number of Email Shows the number of successfully sent email alerts   Alerts    Last Mail Sent Shows the time  in seconds  since last sent email alert     Table 230   Information  frame in the Diagnostics Report Email Logging Global  dialog       Configuration    Parameters Meaning  Sender Shows the email address from which the device sends the email     Possible values   switch hirschmann com  default setting     Sending Interval Shows the count down timer  in minutes  until the next email alert   Possible values   30  1440  default setting  30     Table 231  Configuration  frame in the Diagnostics Report Email Logging Global  dialog       RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 253    Diagnostics 8 2 Report    Urgent    Parameters Meaning    
204. ld     Reinit Delay  s  Defines the delay in seconds for the reinitialization of a device port     Possible values   1  10  default setting  2     If the value for a device port in the  Operation  field is Off  the device tries  to initialize the port again after the time defined here has elapsed    Transmit Delay  s  Defines the delay in seconds for transmitting successive LLDP data  packets              Possible values   1  8192  default setting  2     The recommended value is between a minimum of 1 and a maximum of a  quarter of the value in the  Transmit Interval  s   field   Notification Interval Defines the interval in seconds for transmitting LLDP notifications      s     Possible values    5   3600  default setting  5   After transmitting a notification trap  the device waits for the time interval  to expire before transmitting the next notification trap     Table 296   Configuration  frame in the Diagnostics LLDP Configuration dialog    Table  Parameters Meaning  Port Shows the number of the device port to which the table entry relates     Table 297  Table in the Diagnostics LLDP Configuration dialog    RM GUI RSPS  302 Release 2 0 02 2013    Diagnostics 8 5 LLDP    Parameters Meaning  Admin Status Defines whether the device port transmits and receives LLDP data  packets     Possible values   Transmit  The device port transmits LLDP data packets but stores no  information about neighboring devices   Receive  The device port receives LLDP data packets but transmits no
205. le Ports This column contains the ports available in the device   Dedicated Ports This column contains the device ports that are assigned to the table entry     0O  0O       O    Select one port if the destination MAC address is a Unicast address   Select one or more ports if the destination MAC address is a Multicast  address    Select no port to set up a discard filter  The device discards data  packets with the destination MAC address specified in the table entry     Table 135   Edit Entry  window in the Switching Filters for MAC Addresses dialog    160       RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Switching    Buttons    Button  Set    Reload    Create  Edit Entry  Help    gt     gt  gt     lt     lt  lt     Table 136  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    5 3 Filter for MAC addresses    Meaning    Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save      Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device     Adds a new table entry    Opens the  Edit Entry  window    Opens the online help    Moves the selected entry to the right column   Moves all entries to the right column    Moves the selected entry to the left column   Moves all entries to the left column     161    Switching 5 4 IGMP    5 4 IGMP    The IGMP protocol  Internet Group Management protocol  is a protocol for  dynamically managing Multicast
206. lease 2 0 02 2013    57    Basic Settings 1 6 Port Configuration    Parameters Meaning  Flow Control Activates deactivates the flow control on the device port     Possible values    Not selected   Flow control on the device port is deactivated    Selected  default setting    The sending and evaluating of pause data packets  full duplex   operation  or collisions  half duplex operation  is activated on the port   L  To switch on the flow control in the device  also switch on the   Activate Flow Control  function in the switching Global dialog   O Additionally activate the flow control on the port of the device   connected with this port   On an uplink port  activating the flow control can possibly cause  undesired sending breaks in the higher level network segment      wandering backpressure            When you are using a redundancy function  you deactivate the flow control  on the participating device ports  If the flow control and the redundancy  function are active at the same time  there is a risk that the redundancy  function will not operate as intended     Table 32  Table in the Basic Settings Port Configuration dialog   section   x3c   tblsheetnum gt  of 4     Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    
207. lease 2 0 02 2013    Network Security    4 Network Security    The device has comprehensive configuration options to help protect  individual devices and complex networks against undesired or even  dangerous network traffic     The device can perform the following with data packets  Accept  The device forwards the data packet to its destination   Reject  The device discards the data packet and informs the sender   Drop  The device discards the data packet without informing the sender     The network security area also provides protection against invalid or fake  data traffic that aims to bring down specific services or devices  Denial of  Service  DoS      The menu contains the following dialogs   DoS    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 145    Network Security 4 1 DoS    4 1 DoS    The device supports you in protecting against invalid or fake data traffic that  aims to bring down specific services or devices  Denial of Service  DoS    With this menu you can use various filters to restrict the data traffic for Denial  of Service attacks     The menu contains the following dialog   Global    4 1 1 Global    With this dialog you can configure the DoS settings for the TCP UDP  IP and  ICMP protocols     TCP UDP    The attaching stations uses port scans to prepare network attacks  Here  the station attempts to use the network to detect the devices present and  the services they provide     This frame allows you to activate or deactivate the detection of port scans     The device d
208. lease 2 0 02 2013 327    Appendix A 8 Copyright of Integrated Software    5     One component of the ssh source code is under a 3 clause BSD license  held  by the University of California  since we pulled these parts from original  Berkeley code       Copyright  c  1983  1990  1992  1993  1995     The Regents of the University of California  All rights reserved      Redistribution and use in source and binary forms  with or without     modification  are permitted provided that the following conditions     are met      1  Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright     notice  this list of conditions and the following disclaimer      2  Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright    notice  this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the  documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution     3  Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this  software without specific prior written permission                      THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND     CONTRIBUTORS    AS IS  AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED     WARRANTIES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED TO  THE     IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR    A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED  IN NO EVENT SHALL    THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT     INDIRECT  INCIDENTAL  SPECIAL  EXEMPLARY  OR     CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT L
209. lick  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Help Opens the online help     Table 52  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 79    Security 2 3 Management Access    2 3 5 Server  HTTPS    This tab allows you to define settings for the HTTPS server of the device and  to switch the server on off     The HTTP server provides the graphical user interface  GUI  via an  encrypted HTTP connection  The graphical user interface communicates  with the device based on SNMP via the encrypted HTTP connection and  enables access to the management functions     The device supports up to 10 simultaneous connections via HTTP or HTTPS     A digital certificate is required for the encryption of the HTTP connection  The  device allows you to create this certificate yourself or to load an existing  certificate onto the device     Operation  Parameters Meaning  Operation When the function is switched on  the device supplies the graphical user    interface  GUI  via an encrypted HTTP connection     Possible values   Off   Server is deactivated  The management functions of the device can   only be accessed via the Command Line Interface  CLI     On  default setting    Server is activated  You can access the management functions of the   device via HTTPS              The device can then only be started if there is a certificate on the device     Table 53   Operation  frame in the Securi ty Management Access Server dialog  
210. lly  The address filter stays set up  permanently    igmp   Address filter automatically set up by IGMP Snooping    mgmt   MAC address of the device  The address filter is protected against  changes    invalid   Deletes a manually set up address filter     Table 133  Table in the Switching Filters for MAC Addresses dialog    158       RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Switching 5 3 Filter for MAC addresses    Parameters Meaning  VLAN ID Shows the ID of the VLAN to which the table entry applies     Possible values   1  4042    The device learns the MAC addresses for every VLAN separately   independent VLAN learning      Ports Shows how the corresponding device port transmits data packets for the  adjacent destination address     Possible values   The port does not transmit any data packets to the destination  address   learned  The port transmits data packets to the destination address  The device  sets up the filter automatically based on received data packets   IGMP learned  The port transmits data packets to the destination address  The device  sets up the filter automatically based on IGMP   unicast static  The port transmits data packets to the destination address  A user  created the filter   multicast static  The port transmits data packets to the destination address  A user  created the filter           Table 133  Table in the Switching Filters for MAC Addresses dialog  cont         To remove the learned MAC addresses from the address table   forwarding database   cl
211. log  cont      RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 303    Diagnostics    Parameters    Transmit System  Capabilities    Max Neighbors    FDB Mode    8 5 LLDP    Meaning  Specifies whether the device transmits a TLV  Type Length Value  with  the system capabilities  performance data      Possible values   Selected  default setting   The device transmits a TLV with the system capabilities   Not selected  The device does not transmit a TLV with the system capabilities     Limits the number of neighboring devices to be recorded for this port     Possible values   1  50  default setting  10     Defines which function the device uses to record neighboring devices on  this port     Possible values   lidponly  The device uses only LLDP data packets to record neighboring  devices on this port   macOnly  The device uses learned MAC addresses to record neighboring  devices on this port  The device only uses the MAC address if there is  no other entry in the address table  FDB  Forwarding Database  for  this port   both  The device uses LLDP data packets and learned MAC addresses to  record neighboring devices on this port   autoDetect  default setting   If the device receives LLDP data packets at this port  the device works  the same as with the 11dpOn1y setting  Otherwise  the device works  the same as with the macOn1y setting        Table 297  Table in the Diagnostics LLDP  Configuration dialog  cont      Buttons    Button  Set    Reload    Help    Meaning   Transfers the changes to the 
212. log dialog    RM GUI RSPS  258 Release 2 0 02 2013    Diagnostics 8 2 Report    Parameters Meaning    Minimum Severity Defines the minimum severity of the events  The device sends a log entry  for events with this severity and with more urgent severities to the syslog  server     Possible values   emergency  alert  critical  error  warning  default setting   notice  informational  debug   Type Defines the type of the log entry transmitted by the device           Possible values   systemlog  default setting   audittrail  Active Activates deactivates the transmission of events to the syslog server   Selected  The device sends events to the syslog server   Not selected  default setting   The transmission of events to the syslog server is deactivated        Table 239  Table in the Diagnostics Report  Syslog dialog  cont      Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings Load Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Create Adds a new table entry    Remove Removes the selected table entry    Help Opens the online help     Table 240  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 259    Diagnostics 8 2 Report    8 2 5 Persistent Logging    The device allows you to save all log entries permanently in a file on the  external memory  Therefore  even after the device is res
213. lyzes them    Not selected   Supervision Packets analysis is switched off    The device still receives Supervision Frames without analyzing them     Table 196   Supervision Packet Receiver  frame in the  Redundancy HSR  Configuration dialog    Supervision Packet Transmitter    Parameters Meaning  Active Activates deactivates the transmission of Supervision Packets     Possible values    On  default setting    Transmission of Supervision Packets is activated  The RedBox  transmits its own Supervision Packets              Off   Transmission of Supervision Packets is deactivated   Send VDAN Activates deactivates the transmission of VDAN Supervision Packets   Packets Prerequisite is that you first activate the  Supervision Packet Transmitter      Possible values   Selected  Transmission of VDAN Supervision Packets is activated   In addition to transmitting its own Supervision Packets  the RedBox  transmits Supervision Packets for the VDANs listed in the  Proxy  Node Table    Not selected  default setting   Transmission of VDAN Supervision Packets is deactivated     Table 197  Supervision Packet Transmitter  frame in the  Redundancy HSR Configuration dialog    RM GUI RSPS  218 Release 2 0 02 2013    Redundancy 7 3 HSR    HSR Parameter    Parameters Meaning  HSR Mode Defines unicast traffic forwarding capabilities of the device     Possible values    modeh  default setting    When acting as a proxy for a destination device  the host removes   unicast traffic from the ring and forwa
214. mand line     Possible values   0  1024 alphanumeric characters  including spaces  tabs  line breaks and the following special  characters   1     amp            lt   gt   MP_    G     Table 74   Banner Text  frame in the Security Management Access CLI dialog    Login Banner  tab page    RM GUI RSPS  94 Release 2 0 02 2013    Security 2 3 Management Access    Parameters Meaning  Remaining Shows how many characters are still remaining in the  Banner Text  field  Characters for the text information     Table 74   Banner Text  frame in the Security Management Access CLI dialog    Login Banner  tab page  cont      Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Help Opens the online help     Table 75  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 95    Security 2 4 Port Security    2 4 Port Security    The device allows you to only transmit data packets from desired senders   When this function is switched on  the device checks the VLAN ID and MAC  address of the sender before it transmits a data packet  The device discards  data packets from other senders and logs this event  This restriction makes  MAC Spoofing attacks more difficult     In this dialog a  Wizard  helps you to connect the device ports with one or  more d
215. mbership Interval  field  select a value larger than the  value in the  Max Response Time  field              Possible values     3600  default setting  260     Max Response Defines the time in seconds in which the members of a Multicast group   Time should respond to a query data packet  For their response  the members  select a random time within the response time  You thus help prevent the  Multicast group members from responding to the query at the same time   In the  Max Response Time  field  select a value smaller than the value in  the  Group Membership Interval  field     Possible values    25  default setting  10     Table 140  VLAN  tab in the Switching IGMP IGMP Snooping dialog    RM GUI RSPS  166 Release 2 0 02 2013    Switching    Parameters    Fast Leave Admin    Mode    MRP Expiration  Time    5 4 IGMP    Meaning  Activates deactivates the Fast Leave function for this VLAN     ee values   ff  default setting   When the Fast Leave function is switched off  the device first sends  MAC based queries to the members of the Multicast group  and only  removes an entry when a VLAN does not send any more report  messages   Active  If the device receives an IGMP Leave message from a Multicast  group  when the Fast Leave function is switched on it removes the  entry immediately from its address table   Multicast Router Present Expiration Time  Defines the time in seconds for  which the device waits for a query on this port  which belongs to a VLAN   If the port does not r
216. ment via the graphical user interface             Note  Every application can always be allocated to exactly one list  It is  possible that the applications in this column are already allocated to  another list  If you allocate an application to the list that is already  allocated to another list  the device removes the original allocation     This column contains the applications that are allocated to the selected  list      Allocate Applications  frame in the Security Authentication List  dialog    71    Security    Buttons    Button  Set    Set and back    Back  Reload    Remove  Create    Allocate  Applications    Help   gt    gt  gt    lt    lt  lt     Table 44  Buttons    72    2 2 Authentication List    Meaning    Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings Load Save dialog and click  Save      Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device and goes  back to the previous dialog     Displays the previous dialog again  Changes are lost     Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device     Removes the selected table entry   Adds a new table entry   Displays the  Allocate Applications  dialog     Opens the online help    Moves the selected entry to the right column   Moves all entries to the right column    Moves the selected entry to the left column   Moves all entries to the left column     RM GUI RSPS  Release 
217. mote Authentication Dial In User Service  allows you to manage  the users at a central location in the network  A RADIUS server performs the  following tasks here   Authentication  The authentication server authenticates the users when the RADIUS  client at the access point forwards the users    login data to the server   Authorization  The authentication server authorizes logged in users for selected services  by assigning various parameters for the relevant terminal device to the  RADIUS client at the access point     The device works in the role of the RADIUS client if you have assigned the  radius policy to an application in the Security Authentication List  dialog  The device forwards the users    login data to the primary  authentication server  The authentication server decides whether the login  data is valid and transfers the user   s authorizations to the device     The menu contains the following dialogs   Global  Authentication Server  Authentication Statistics    RM GUI RSPS  102 Release 2 0 02 2013    Security 2 5 RADIUS    2 5 1 Global    This dialog allows you to define basic settings for RADIUS     RADIUS Configuration    Parameters Meaning  Max  Number of Defines how often the device retransmits an unanswered request to the  Retransmits authentication server before the device sends the request to an alternative    authentication server     Possible values   1  15  default setting  4   Timeout  s  Defines how many seconds the device waits for a response after
218. mp snooping CLI command  to reset the IGMP Snooping entries  including the counter for the  processed Multicast control data packets     Table 138   Information  frame in the Switching IGMP IGMP Snooping dialog    Interface    This tab page allows you to configure the IGMP Snooping protocol for    every port     Parameters  Port  Active    Meaning  Shows the number of the device port to which the table entry relates     Activates deactivates the IGMP Snooping protocol for this port   Prerequisite  The IGMP Snooping protocol is activated globally in the  device     Possible values    off  default setting    IGMP Snooping is deactivated for this port  The port has left the  Multicast data stream    Active   IGMP Snooping is activated for this port  The port is included in the  Multicast data stream              Table 139   Interface  tab in the Switching IGMP IGMP Snooping dialog  section   x3c  tblsheetnum gt  of 3     164    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Switching    Parameters    Group Membership  Interval    Max Response  Time    MRP Expiration  Time    Fast Leave Admin  Mode    Static Query Port    5 4 IGMP    Meaning   Defines the time in seconds for which a port from a dynamic Multicast   group remains entered in the address table when the device does not   receive any more report data packets from the port    In the  Group Membership Interval  field  select a value larger than the  value in the  Max Response Time  field     Possible values   2  3600  default setti
219. n a CLI connection set up using SSH  on a CLI connection set up using Telnet    You define the required settings in this dialog  By assigning the severity you  define which events the device logs     The buttons in the dialog allow you to save a ZIP archive with system  information and the Java Applet of the graphical user interface  GUI  on your  PC     Console Logging    Parameters Meaning  Operation When the function is switched on  the device logs the events on the  console     Possible values   On  Off  default setting   Severity Defines the minimum severity for the events  The device logs all events  with this severity and with more urgent severities   The device outputs the messages on the V 24 interface              Possible values   emergency  alert  critical  error  warning  default setting   notice  informational  debug          Table 222  Console Logging  frame in the Diagnostics Report Global dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 247    Diagnostics    8 2 Report    Buffered Logging    The device buffers logged events in 2 separate storage areas so that the  log entries for urgent events are kept     This dialog allows you to define the minimum severity for events that the  device buffers in the storage area with a higher priority     Parameters  Severity    Meaning   Defines the minimum severity for the events  The device buffers log  entries for events with this severity and with more urgent severities in the  storage area with a higher priority     Possibl
220. n as the specified maximum number of files has been attained  the  device deletes the oldest file and renames the remaining files     Possible values   0  25  default setting  4     The value 0 deactivates saving of log entries in the log file     Severity Defines the minimum severity of the events  The device saves the log  entry for events with this severity and with more urgent severities in the log  file on the external memory     Possible values   emergency  alert  critical  error  warning  default setting   notice  informational  debug    Target Defines the external memory device for logging           Possible values   sd    Table 242  Configuration  frame in the Diagnostics Report Persistent Logging  dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 261    Diagnostics 8 2 Report    Table  Parameters Meaning  Index Shows a sequential number to which the table entry relates   Possible values   Le 2D  The device automatically defines this number   File Name Shows the file name of the log file on the external memory   Possible values   messages  messages X  File Size Shows the size of the log file on the external memory in bytes     Table 243  Table in the Diagnostics Report Persistent Logging dialog    To delete the log files  click  Delete Persistent Log File  in the Basic  Settings Restart dialog     Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Sa
221. n is for end device ports  where few MAC  address changes occur     Operation  Parameters Meaning  Operation Activates deactivates the MAC Notification function globally on the device     Possible values   On  The device sends traps for the active rows to the active management  stations in Diagnostics Status Configuration Alarms  Traps    off  default setting              Table 288  Operation  frame in the Diagnostics Status Configuration MAC  Notification dialog    Configuration  Parameters Meaning  Intervals  s  Defines the interval  in seconds  between notifications  The device buffer    contains up to 20 addresses  If the buffer is full before the interval expires   then the device sends a trap to the management station     Possible values   0  2147483647    Table 289   Configuration  frame in the Diagnostics Status Configuration MAC  Notification dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 297    Diagnostics 8 4 Status Configuration    Table  Parameters Meaning  Port Shows the number of the device port to which the table entry relates   Active Activates deactivates the MAC Notification function on this port     Possible values   Selected  When globally activated  the device sends traps for this row to the  active management stations in Diagnostics Status  Configuration Alarms  Traps    Not selected  default setting   MAC Address Shows the last MAC addresses added or removed from the address table  for this interface  When the field contains 20 addresses  the device sends 
222. n page 131     Table 110   Operation IEEE1588   PTPv2 BC  frame in the Time  PTP  Boundary  Clock  Globa1 dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 129    Time    Parameters  Priority 2    Domain Number    3 3 PTP    Meaning  Defines priority 2 for the port     Possible values   0   255  default setting  128     The    Best Master Clock    algorithm evaluates priority 2 of the participating  devices if the previously evaluated criteria are the same for multiple  devices    The lower you set this value  the more probable it is that the device  becomes the reference time source  Grandmaster     See    Grandmaster    on page 131     Assigns the device to a PTP domain     Possible values   0   255  default setting  0     The device only transmits time information from and to devices in the  same domain     Table 110   Operation IEEE1588   PTPv2 BC  frame in the Time  PTP  Boundary  Clock Globa1 dialog  cont      Status IEEE1588   PTPv2 BC    Parameters  Two Step  Steps Removed    Meaning   Shows that the clock is operating in Two Step mode    Shows the number of communication paths passed through between the  local clock of the device and the reference clock  Grandmaster     For a PTP slave  the value 1 means that the clock is connected with the  reference time source  Grandmaster  directly via 1 communication path     Offset to Master  ns  Shows the measured difference  offset  between the local clock and the    reference clock  Grandmaster  in minutes  The PTP slave calculates
223. nd Multicast  Listener Discovery  MLD  Snooping Switches   Definitions of Managed Objects for IEEE 802 3 Medium Attachment Units   MAUs     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Appendix    A 3 Underlying IEEE Standards    A 3 Underlying IEEE Standards    IEEE 802 1AB  IEEE 802 1D 2004    IEEE 802 1Q 2005    IEEE 802 1Q 2005  IEEE 802 1X   IEEE 802 3 2002  IEEE 802 3ac  IEEE 802 3x    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Topology Discovery  LLDP     Media access control  MAC  bridges  includes IEEE 802 1p Priority  and Dynamic Multicast Filtering     Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks   VLAN Tagging  Port Based VLANs     Spanning Tree  STP   Rapid Spanning Tree  RSTP   Port Authentication   Ethernet   VLAN Tagging   Flow Control    315    Appendix A 4 Underlying IEC Norms    A 4 Underlying IEC Norms    IEC 62439 High availability automation networks  HSR     High availability Seamless Redundancy  MRP     Media Redundancy Protocol based on a ring topology  PRP     Parallel Redundancy Protocol    RM GUI RSPS  316 Release 2 0 02 2013    Appendix A 5 Underlying ANSI Norms    A 5 Underlying ANSI Norms    ANSI TIA 1057 Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices  April 2006    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 317    Appendix A 6 Maintenance    A 6 Maintenance    Hirschmann is continually working to improve and develop our software  You  should regularly check whether there is a new version of the software that  provides you with additional benefits  You will find softwar
224. ndancy Protocol  PRP      The main advantage of PRP is that the destination node receives packets  from the source as long as 1 LAN is available  The absence of the second  LAN due to repairs or maintenance has no impact on the packet  transmission     The network device which connects the end devices to the network  implements the PRP protocol  The Ethernet switches in both LANs are  standard switches that are oblivious to PRP  A Double Attached Node  implementing PRP  DANP  is a network device with PRP functionality and  has 1 connection into each independent LAN  A Single Attached Node  SAN   is a standard Ethernet device with a single LAN interface directly connected  to one of the redundant LANs  For this reason  a SAN is unable to use the  redundant LAN     A Redundancy Box  RedBox  is a network device which implements the PRP  functionality for standard ethernet devices  A standard ethernet device when  connected to a PRP network via a RedBox is a virtual DANP  VDAN   Many  applications and devices used for signal and control functions or VoIP  for  example  need an integrated dual PRP interface which delivers packets  without interruption     Note  PRP is available for devices with hardware for enhanced redundancy  functions  In order to use the PRP functions  load the PRP device software   HiOS 2S xxx RSPS 02000 bin where xxx PRP      RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 207    Redundancy 7 2 PRP    A WARNING    RING LOOP HAZARD    To avoid loops during the configuration
225. ng  260     Defines the time in seconds in which the members of a Multicast group  should respond to a query data packet  For their response  the members  select a random time within the response time  You thus help prevent the  Multicast group members from responding to the query at the same time   In the  Max Response Time  field  select a value smaller than the value in  the  Group Membership Interval  field     Possible values    1  25  default setting  10   Specifies the MRP  Multicast Router Present  expiration time  The MRP  expiration time is the time in seconds for which the device waits for a query  on this port  If the port does not receive a query data packet  the device  removes the port from the list of ports with connected Multicast routers     Possible values   2  3600  default setting  260   The value 0 means an unlimited timeout   no expiration time     Activates deactivates the Fast Leave function for this port     Possible values   off  default setting    When the Fast Leave function is switched off  the device first sends  MAC based queries to the members of the Multicast group  and only  removes an entry when a port does not send any more report  messages    Active   If the device receives an IGMP Leave message from a Multicast  group  when the Fast Leave function is switched on it removes the  entry immediately from its address table     Configures the port as a static query port in all VLANs              Possible values    off  default setting    The p
226. nt      RM GUI RSPS  194 Release 2 0 02 2013    QoS Priority 6 3 802 1D p Mapping    6 3 802 1D p Mapping    The device allows you send data packets with a VLAN tagging according to  the QoS priority information contained in the data packet with a higher or  lower priority     In this dialog you assign the VLAN priority to the traffic classes  The traffic  classes are assigned to the priority queues of the device ports     Table    To change the settings click the desired row of the  Traffic Class  column  and modify the value     Parameters Meaning  VLAN Priority VLAN priority of received data packets   Traffic Class Defines the traffic class     Possible values   O23    The traffic classes are assigned to the priority queues of the device ports   Traffic class 3     queue with medium priority  Traffic class 0     queue with the lowest priority    Table 170  Table in the Q0S Priority 802 1D p Mapping dialog    VLAN Priority Traffic class Content description according to IEEE 802 1D  0 1 Best Effort  Normal data without prioritizing   1 0 Background  Non time critical data and background services   2 0 Standard  Normal data   3 1 Excellent Effort  Important data   4 2 Controlled load  Time critical data with a high priority   5 2 Video    Video transmission with delays and jitter  lt  100 ms     Table 171 Default assignment of the VLAN priority to the traffic classes    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 195    QoS Priority 6 3 802 1D p Mapping    VLAN Priority Traffic class Co
227. ntent description according to IEEE 802 1D  6 3 Voice   Voice transmission with delays and jitter  lt  10 ms   7 3 Network Control   Data for network management and redundancy   mechanisms     Table 171 Default assignment of the VLAN priority to the traffic classes  cont      Note  Network management protocols and redundancy mechanisms use  the highest traffic class  Therefore  select another traffic class for  application data     Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Help Opens the online help     Table 172  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  196 Release 2 0 02 2013    QoS Priority 6 4 IP DSCP Mapping    6 4 IP DSCP Mapping    The device allows you send IP data packets according to the DSCP value  contained in the data packet with a higher or lower priority     In this dialog you assign the DSCP values to the traffic classes  The traffic  classes are assigned to the priority queues of the device ports     Table    To change the settings click the desired row of the  Traffic class  column  and modify the value     Parameters Meaning  DSCP Value Shows the DSCP value of received IP data packets   Traffic Class Defines the traffic class     Possible values   O43    The traffic classes are assigned to the priority queue
228. number of the device software that the device ran when  it saved the configuration profile   Fingerprint Shows the checksum saved in the configuration profile   The device calculates the checksum when saving the settings and inserts  it into the configuration profile     Table 28  Table in the Basic Settings Load Save dialog  section   x3c  tblsheetnum gt  of 3     RM GUI RSPS  46 Release 2 0 02 2013    Basic Settings 1 4 Load Save    Parameters Meaning   Fingerprint Verified Shows whether the checksum in the configuration profile is valid   The device calculates the checksum again and compares it with the  checksum in the configuration profile     Possible values   Selected  The saved settings are consistent  The checksums match   Not selected  The configuration profile contains modified settings  The checksums  are different   Possible causes       The file is damaged       The file system on the external memory is inconsistent       A user has exported the configuration profile and changed the  XML file outside the device     Note  This function identifies changes to the settings in the configuration  profile  The function does not provide protection against operating the  device with modified settings     Table 28  Table in the Basic Settings Load Save dialog  section   x3c  tblsheetnum gt  of 3     Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Loa
229. o switch the server on off     The HTTP server provides the graphical user interface  GUI  via an HTTP  connection  The graphical user interface communicates with the device  based on SNMP and enables access to the management functions     The device supports up to 10 simultaneous connections via HTTP or HTTPS     Operation  Parameters Meaning  Operation When the function is switched on  the device supplies the graphical user    interface  GUI  via an HTTP connection     Possible values   Of     Server is deactivated    On  default setting   Server is activated  You can access the management functions of the  device via HTTP              Table 50   Operation  frame in the Securi ty Management Access Server dialog    HTTP  tab page    Configuration  Parameters Meaning  Listen TCP Port Defines the number of the TCP port on which the server receives requests  from clients     Possible values   1  65535  default setting  80   Exception  Port 2222 is reserved for internal functions     The server restarts automatically after the port is changed  In the process   the device terminates open connections to the server     Table 51   Configuration  frame in the Security Management Access  Server dialog    HTTP  tab page    RM GUI RSPS  78 Release 2 0 02 2013    Security 2 3 Management Access    Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and c
230. ock is  classed as unsynchronized     Possible values   31  1000000000  default setting  5000     Table 107  Configuration IEEE 1588 PTP  frame in the Time  PTP Global dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 127    Time    Parameters    Enable PTP  Management    3 3 PTP    Meaning  Activates deactivates the PTP management defined in the PTP standard     Possible values   selected  PTP management is activated   not selected  default setting   PTP management is deactivated     Table 107  Configuration IEEE 1588 PTP  frame in the Time  PTP Global dialog    Status    Parameters  Is Synchronized    Max Offset  Absolute  ns     PTP Time    Meaning   Shows whether the local clock is synchronized with the reference clock   Grandmaster     The local clock is synchronized when the path difference between the  local clock and the reference clock  Grandmaster  falls below the  synchronization lower boundary one time  This status is kept until the path  difference exceeds the synchronization upper boundary one time    You define the synchronization boundaries in the  Configuration IEEE  1588 PTP  frame     Shows the maximum path difference in nanoseconds that has occurred  since the local clock was synchronized with the reference clock   Grandmaster     Shows the date and time for the PTP time scale when the local clock is  synchronized with the reference clock  Grandmaster     Format  Month Day  Year hh mm ss AM PM    Table 108  Status  frame in the Time  PTP Global dialog    Buttons 
231. of a user account due to too many failed logon attempts  Locking of the management access due to failed logon attempts  Commands executed in CLI  apart from show commands  Changes to configuration variables  Changes to the system time  File transfer operations  including firmware updates  Configuration changes via HiDiscovery  Firmware updates and automatic configuration of the device via the  external memory  Opening and closing of SNMP via an HTTPS tunnel    Buttons   Button Meaning   Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Search Opens the  Search  dialog  The dialog allows you to search the log file for  search terms or regular expressions    Save Opens the  Save  dialog  The dialog allows you to save the log file in  HTML format on your PC    Help Opens the online help     Table 249  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 265    Diagnostics 8 3 Ports    8 3 Ports    This menu shows information on the port statistics  on the utilization on the  individual ports  and on the connected SFP transceivers     The menu contains the following dialogs   Statistics Table  Utilization  SFP  Port Monitor  Auto Disable  Port Mirroring    8 3 1 Statistics Table  This dialog shows you in table form for each device port how many data  packets the device has sent and received     To reset the values in the table to 0  click  Reset port counters  in the Basic  Settings Restart dialog     Buttons  Button Meaning  Reload Up
232. ofile in the field  Period to undo  while Connection is lost  s         Ifthe non volatile memory  NVM  contains multiple configuration  profiles  the device loads the configuration profile designated as   Selected    off  default setting   Function is switched off   Switch the function off again before you close the graphical user  interface  You thus prevent the device from restoring the configuration  profile designated as  Selected               Note  Before you switch on the function  save the settings in the  configuration profile  Therefore  current changes that are only saved  temporarily in the device are kept     Specifies the time in seconds after which the device loads the  selected   configuration profile from the non volatile memory  NVM  if the connection  is lost     Possible values   30  600  default setting  600     Specify a sufficiently large value  Take into account the time when you are  only viewing the dialogs of the graphical user interface without changing  or updating them    Shows the IP address of the PC on which you have activated the function     Possible values   IPv4 address  default setting  0 0 0 0     Table 27   Undo Modification of Configuration  frame in the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog    44    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Basic Settings 1 4 Load Save       Table  Parameters Meaning  Storage Type Shows the storage location of the configuration profile   Possible values    RAM  volatile memory of the device   In the volatile m
233. ofiles are the same    Not selected   The configuration profiles are different  Changes in the device are only   saved temporarily if  for example  you click on  Set  in a dialog while   the device is operating   ENVM synchron to Shows whether the  selected  configuration profile in the external memory  NVM  ENVM  and the  selected  configuration profile in the non volatile memory   NVM  are the same        Possible values   Selected  The configuration profiles are the same   Not selected  The configuration profiles are different   Possible causes       No external memory is connected to the device       Inthe Basic Settings External Memory dialog  the  Auto save  config on ENVM  function is activated        Table 26   Information  frame in the Basic Settings Load Save dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 43    Basic Settings    1 4 Load Save    Undo Modifications of Configuration    Parameters  Operation    Period to undo while  Connection is lost     s     Watchdog IP  Address    Meaning    When a user switches on the function  the device continuously checks  whether it can still be reached from the IP address of the user  If the  connection is lost  after a defined time period the device loads the   Selected  configuration profile from the non volatile memory  NvM    Afterwards  the device can be accessed again     Possible values   On  Function is switched on       You define the time period between the loss of the connection and  the loading of the configuration pr
234. ology Discovery  dialog  cont         Display FDB Entries    Parameters    Meaning    Display FDB Entries Adds entries to the table for devices without active LLDP support     Possible values   Not selected  default setting   The table only shows entries for devices with LLDP support   Selected  The table shows entries for devices with and without LLDP support   The device uses information from its address table  FDB  Forwarding  Database      Table 300   Display FDB Entries  checkbox in the  LLDP  tab of the  Diagnostics LLDP Topology Discovery dialog    306       RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Diagnostics    LLDP MED    8 5 LLDP    LLDP for Media Endpoint Devices  LLDP MED  is an extension to LLDP  that operates between endpoint devices and network devices  It  specifically provides support for VoIP applications  In this support rule  it  provides an additional set of common advertisement  Type Length Value   TLV   messages  The device uses the TLVs for capabilities discovery  such as network policy  Power over Ethernet  inventory management and  location information     Parameters  Port  Device Class    VLAN ID    Priority  DSCP    Unknown Bit Status    Tagged Bit Status    Hardware Revision    Meaning  Shows the number of the device port to which the table entry relates     Shows the device class of the remotely connected device   A value of notDefined indicates that the device has capabilities not  covered by any of the  LLDP MED  classes   A value of endpointClass1
235. omatically after the port is changed  Existing  connections remain in place     Session Count Shows how many connections to the server are currently set up   Max  Number of Defines the maximum number of connections to the server that can be set  Sessions up simultaneously   Possible values   1  5  default setting  5   Session Timeout Defines the timeout in minutes  After the device has been inactive for this   min  time it ends the session for the user logged on     Possible values   1  160  default setting  5     The value 0 deactivates the function  The user remains logged on when  inactive     Table 59   Configuration  frame in the Security Management Access Server dialog    SSH  tab page    Fingerprint    The fingerprint is an easily verified hexadecimal number sequence that  uniquely identifies the RSA or DSA key  host key  of the SSH server     Parameters Meaning  DSA Number sequence of the public DSA key of the server   RSA Number sequence of the public RSA key of the server     Table 60   Server  dialog   SSH  tab   Fingerprint  frame    After importing a new RSA or DSA key  the device continues to display  the existing fingerprint until you restart the server     RM GUI RSPS  84 Release 2 0 02 2013    Security    Signature    2 3 Management Access    Parameters    DSA Present    Meaning    Shows whether a DSA key  host key  is present in the device     RSA Present    Possible values   selected  A key is present   not selected  No key is present     Shows whether an R
236. on Shows the MIB Managed Objects description to which the Port and  Interlink entries refer    Port A Shows the number of MIB Managed Objects events on port A  The device  examines the traffic as it passes from receive transceiver A to the LRE    Port B Shows the number of MIB Managed Objects events on port B  The device  examines the traffic as it passes from receive transceiver B to the LRE    Interlink Shows the number of MIB Managed Objects events on the interlink  The    counters are active for the MIB Managed Objects that pertain to the  interlink  The other counters remain empty  A sample is made of the traffic  as it passes from the LRE to the switch    CPU Port Shows the number of MIB Managed Objects events on the CPU Port   There is one MIB Managed Object that pertains to the CPU Port  The other  counters remain empty  A sample is made of the traffic as it passes from  receive transceiver to the CPU     Table 204  Table in the Redundancy HSR Statistics dialog    RM GUI RSPS  222 Release 2 0 02 2013    Redundancy 7 3 HSR    Buttons  Button Meaning  Delete Deletes the entire table   Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device   Help Opens the online help     Table 205  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 223    Redundancy 7 4 Spanning Tree    7 4 Spanning Tree    The Spanning Tree Protocol  STP  is a protocol that deactivates redundant  paths of a network in order to avoid loops  If a network component f
237. on this port according to the  Switching VLAN  Static dialog  If the VLAN tagging in the data packet  matches one of these VLANs  the port forwards the data packet to ports  in this VLAN  Otherwise the port discards the data packet   not selected  default setting   The port forwards data packets received with a VLAN tagging to other  ports without comparing the VLAN IDs  Thus the port also transmits data  packets with a VLAN tagging even though it is not a member of this  VLAN        Table 161  switching  VLAN  Port dialog  cont         Note  If the MRP Ring configuration is assigned to a VLAN  the device  automatically performs the VLAN configuration for this port    If the MRP Ring configuration is not assigned to a VLAN  select the port  VLAN ID 1     Buttons    Button  Set    Reload    Meaning   Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings Load Save dialog and click  Save     Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device     Table 162  Buttons    184    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Switching 5 5 VLAN    Button Meaning  Help Opens the online help     Table 162  Buttons  cont      5 5 5 Voice    Use the Voice VLAN feature to separate voice and data traffic on a port  by  VLAN and or priority  A primary benefit of Voice VLAN is safeguarding the  quality of voice traffic when data traffic on the port is high     The device detec
238. or the associated operating software  In addition  we refer to the conditions of use  specified in the license contract     You can get the latest version of this manual on the Internet at the Hirschmann product site   www hirschmann com      Printed in Germany   Hirschmann Automation and Control GmbH  Stuttgarter Str  45 51   72654 Neckartenzlingen   Germany   Tel    49 1805 141538    Rel  2 0   02 2013     11 02 2013    Contents    Contents    About this Manual  Key    Graphical User Interface    1 Basic Settings  1 1 System  1 2 Network  1 2 1 Global  1 2 2 ARP Table  1 2 3 IP Address Conflict Detection  1 3 Software  1 4 Load Save  1 5 External Memory  1 6 Port Configuration  1 7 Restart  2 Security  2 1 User Management  2 2 Authentication List  2 3 Management Access  2 3 1 Server  2 3 2 Server  SNMP  2 3 3 Server  Telnet  2 3 4 Server  HTTP  2 3 5 Server  HTTPS  2 3 6 Server  SSH  2 3 7 SNMPv1 v2 Community  2 3 8 IP Access Restriction  2 3 9 Web  2 3 10 CLI  2 3 11 CLI  Global  2 3 12 CLI Login Banner  2 4 Port Security  RM GUI RSPS    Release 2 0 02 2013    Contents    2 5    2 6    3 1    3 2    3 3    5 1  5 2  5 3  5 4    RADIUS   2 5 1 Global   2 5 2 Authentication Server  2 5 3 Authentication Statistics    Pre login Banner  Time    Basic Settings  3 1 1 Global  3 1 2 Daylight Saving Time    3 2 1 Client  3 2 2 Server    Global   Boundary Clock   Boundary clock  Global  Boundary clock  Port  Transparent Clock  Transparent clock  Global  Transparent clock  Port    WW
239. ort is is not configured as a static query port    The device only transmits IGMP report messages to the port when it  receives IGMP queries    Active   The port is configured as a static query port              Table 139   Interface  tab in the Switching  IGMP  IGMP Snooping dialog  section   x3c  tblsheetnum gt  of 3     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    165    Switching 5 4 IGMP    Parameters Meaning  VLAN IDs Shows the ID of the VLAN to which the table entry applies     Possible values    4042  VLAN IDs that are set up     Table 139   Interface  tab in the Switching  IGMP IGMP Snooping dialog  section   x3c  tblsheetnum gt  of 3     VLAN    This tab page allows you to configure the IGMP Snooping protocol for  every VLAN     Parameters Meaning  VLAN ID Shows the ID of the VLAN to which the table entry applies     Possible values     4042  VLAN IDs that are set up     Active Activates deactivates the IGMP Snooping protocol for this VLAN   Prerequisite  The IGMP Snooping protocol is activated globally in the  device     Bers values   ff  default setting   IGMP Snooping is deactivated for this VLAN  The VLAN has left the  Multicast data stream   Active  IGMP Snooping is activated for this VLAN  The VLAN has joined the  Multicast data stream   Group Membership Defines the time in seconds for which a VLAN from a dynamic Multicast  Interval group remains entered in the address table when the device does not  receive any more report data packets from the VLAN   In the  Group Me
240. oses   It assists the administrator in port analysis   It eliminates the possibility that this port causes other ports on the module   or the entire module  to shut down     Configuration  Parameters Meaning  Link Flap Defines whether the device enables a port after a Link Flap condition    produces a disable port action     Possible values   Selected  Enables the ports after the user defined time elapses   Not selected  default setting   The ports remain disabled   CRC Error Defines whether the device enables a port after a CRC Fragments  condition produces a disable port action     Possible values   Selected  Enables the ports after the user defined time elapses   Not selected  default setting   The ports remain disabled     Table 262  Configuration  frame in the Diagnostics Ports Auto Disable dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 275    Diagnostics    Parameters  Duplex Mismatch    DHCP Snooping    ARP Rate    8 3 Ports    Meaning    Defines whether the device enables a port after a Duplex Mismatch  condition produces a disable port action     Possible values    Selected   Enables the ports after the user defined time elapses    Not selected  default setting    The ports remain disabled   Defines whether the device enables a port after a DCHP Snooping  condition produces a disable port action     Possible values    Selected   Enables the ports after the user defined time elapses    Not selected  default setting    The ports remain disabled   Defines whether the device
241. pe of the address entry     Possible values   static  Static ARP entry  This entry is kept when the ARP table is deleted   dynamic  Dynamic entry  The device deletes this entry when the    Aging Time     has been exceeded  if the device does not receive any data from this  device during this time     Table 13  Table in the Basic Settings Network ARP Table dialog   cont      To reset the counters  click  Reset ARP table  in the Basic  Settings Restart dialog     Buttons  Button Meaning  Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device   Help Opens the online help     Table 14  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  32 Release 2 0 02 2013    Basic Settings 1 2 Network    1 2 3 IP Address Conflict Detection    The device allows you to detect whether another device in the network is  using its own IP address  Whenever the device detects an address conflict   the status LED of the device flashes red 4 times     In this dialog you specify the procedure with which the device detects  address conflicts and define the required settings for this  In the table the  device logs instances of another device in the network using its own IP  address     Operation  Parameters Meaning  Operation When this function is switched on  the device detects whether another    device in the network is using its own IP address     Possible values   On  default setting   The address conflict detection is switched on   OEF  The address conflict detection is switched off
242. pens a telnet session directly on the device  Using this dialog  you configure the device using CLI commands     For detailed information on CLI commands  review the    Command Line  Interface    reference manual     Buttons  Button Meaning  Help Opens the online help     Table 303  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  310 Release 2 0 02 2013    Appendix    A Appendix    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 311    Appendix    A 1 Technical Data    A 1 Technical Data    Switching  Size of MAC address table   incl  static filters     Max  number of statically configured MAC  address filters    Max  number of MAC address filters learnable  via IGMP Snooping    MTU  Max  length of over long packets     Latency  with 64 Byte data packets   100 Mbit s  10 Mbit s    Number of Switch queues  Port priorities that can be set    VLAN  VLAN ID  Number of VLANs    312    2048  2k    100   256   2000 Bytes   Layer 2  typ  3 4 us  Layer 2  typ  7 8 us    4 queues  0  3    1  4042    max  16 simultaneously per device  max  16 simultaneously per port    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Appendix    A 2 List of RFCs    A 2 List of RFCs    RFC 768  RFC 783  RFC 791  RFC 792  RFC 793  RFC 826  RFC 854  RFC 855  RFC 951  RFC 1112  RFC 1157  RFC 1155  RFC 1212  RFC 1213  RFC 1493  RFC 1542  RFC 1643  RFC 1757  RFC 1867  RFC 1901  RFC 1905  RFC 1906  RFC 1945  RFC 2068  RFC 2131  RFC 2132  RFC 2233  RFC 2236  RFC 2246  RFC 2346  RFC 2365  RFC 2474    RFC 2475  RFC 2578  RFC 2579  RFC 2580  RFC 2613  RFC 2618    R
243. pointer over the button  the user interface opens  3 a bubble help with the following information   The time at which the device last refreshed the values  Name of the user logged in  Device name  Network protocol by means of which you are logged in to the device     The device automatically refreshes the values once a minute  To refresh the  display manually  click the   button     By right clicking this symbol you can open the Basic Settings  System dialog and   the Basic Settings Network Global dialog directly    When you position the mouse pointer over the button  the user interface opens    a bubble help with the summary of the Diagnostics System Configuration   Check dialog     To refresh the display  click the    button     By right clicking this symbol you can open the  Diagnostics System Configuration Check dialog directly   Ends the session and terminates the connection to the device     Shows the time in seconds after which the device automatically ends the session  when the user is inactive     You specify the timeout period in the Security Management Access  Web dialog     Table 2  Buttons in the status line    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 17    Graphical User Interface    Button  k     Function    Shows that the configuration profile in the volatile memory  RAM  differs from the   selected  configuration profile in the permanent memory  NVM   Save the current  device configuration permanently so that the current settings will still be available  to you after
244. pplies the devices in the network with a precise time   The procedure enables the clocks in the network to be synchronized to a  degree of precision of just a few 100 ns  The protocol uses Multicast  communication  so the load on the network due to the PTP synchronization  messages is negligible     Using the    Best Master Clock    algorithm  the devices determine the devices  in the network with the most accurate time which are to be used as a  reference time source  Grandmaster   Subsequently the participating  devices synchronize themselves with this reference time source     If you want to transport PTP time accurately through your network  only use  devices with PTP hardware support on the transport paths     The protocol differentiates between the following clocks    Ordinary Clock  OC    This clock has 1 PTP port and operates either as PTP master or PTP   slave    Boundary Clock  BC    This clock has any number of PTP ports and operates as both PTP   master and PTP slave  In its respective network segment  the clock   operates as an Ordinary Clock        As PTP slave  the clock synchronizes itself with a PTP master that is  higher than the device in the cascade        As PTP master  the clock forwards the time information via the  network to PTP slaves that are higher than the device in the cascade    Transparent Clock  TC    This clock has any number of PTP ports  In contrast to the Boundary   Clock  this clock only corrects the time information before forwarding it 
245. profile only if it is encrypted  and the password matches the password stored in the device     When you activate an older configuration profile  the device takes over the  settings of the functions contained in this software version  The device  sets the settings of newer functions to the state on delivery     Removes the configuration profile selected in the table from the non   volatile memory  NVM  or from the external memory  ENVM         If the configuration profile is designated as  Selected   the device prevents  you from removing the configuration profile     Table 29  Buttons  section  x3c  tblsheetnum gt  of 5     48    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Basic Settings    Button  Select    Export       1 4 Load Save    Meaning  Designates the configuration profile selected in the table as  Selected   In  the  Selected  column  the checkbox is now selected     The device loads the settings of this configuration profile to the volatile  memory  RAM  during the restart or when applying the function  Undo  Modification of Configuration        Only designate an unencrypted device configuration as  Selected    when the configuration encryption in the device is switched off    Only designate an encrypted device configuration as  Selected  when   the following prerequisites are fulfilled        The configuration encryption in the device is switched on        The password of the configuration profile matches the password  stored in the device     Otherwise the device is un
246. r  received  Another device exists in the ring that is operating as the ring manager   Activate the  Ring Manager  function if there is exactly one device in  the ring   Configuration error  Connection in ring is connected  to incorrect port  Aline in the ring is connected with a different port instead of with a ring  port  The device only receives test data packets on 1 ring port                       Table 181  Information  frame in the Redundancy  MRP dialog    RM GUI RSPS    Release 2 0 02 2013    205    Redundancy 7 1 MRP    Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Delete ring Switches off the redundancy function and resets all the settings in the   configuration dialog to the state on delivery    Help Opens the online help     Table 182  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  206 Release 2 0 02 2013    Redundancy 7 2 PRP    7 2 PRP    PRP uses 2 independent LANs with arbitrary ring  mesh  star  and bus  topologies resulting in a high availability of network connection  The device  connects to the PRP network with 100 Mbit s optical SFPs or 100 Mbit s FDX  twisted pair interfaces installed in specially marked dedicated ports A and B  for the LAN links  The International Standard IEC 62439 3 describes the  Parallel Redu
247. rame of the  Basic Configuration  System dialog for the monitored functions  The device  displays the detected fault with the higher priority when 2 or more detected  faults occur at the same time  The order of the functions listed in the   Monitoring  frame represents the monitor priority  Meaning that  the higher  a function appears at the top of the list  the higher the priority  When you  repair the displayed detected fault  the device displays the next higher  detected fault     Security Status    Parameters Meaning    Security Status Shows the current status of the security relevant settings in the device   The device determines the status from the individual monitored  parameters     Possible values   Error  OK    Table 275  Security Status  frame in the Diagnostics Status  Configuration Security Status dialog    RM GUI RSPS  286 Release 2 0 02 2013    Diagnostics 8 4 Status Configuration    Trap Configuration    Parameters Meaning    Generate Trap Activates deactivates the sending of an SNMP message  trap  when the  value in the  Security Status  field changes     Possible values   Selected  The device sends a trap   Not selected  default setting   The device does not send a trap     The prerequisite for sending SNMP messages  traps  is that the function  is switched on in the Diagnostics Alarms  Traps  dialog and at least 1  SNMP manager is defined     Table 276  Trap Configuration  frame in the Diagnostics Status  Configuration Security Status dialog    Monitoring  
248. rds it to the destination address    modeu   When acting as a proxy for a destination device  the host forwards   unicast traffic around the ring and to the destination address  The   source node discards unicast traffic when the frames return   Switching Node Defines the specific role that the device performs in the HSR ring     Type  yP Possible values     hsrredboxsan  default setting    Use this setting when connecting SANs to the device in an HSR ring   hsrredboxprpa   Use this setting to connect this device to PRP LAN A  Additionally  set  the  RedBox Identity  for the appropriate network connection   hsrredboxprpb   Use this setting to connect this device to PRP LAN B  Additionally  set  the  RedBox Identity  for the appropriate network connection     Redbox Identity Defines the PRP LAN traffic tags     The parameter identifies and tags traffic for the PRP LAN connected to  this device  The device identifies traffic for up to 7 PRP LANs coupled to  the HSR ring     Prerequisite is that you configure the  Switching Node Type  to  hsrredboxprpa or hsrredboxprpb     Possible values    idla  default setting    Use this value to process HSR traffic for PRP Network 1 LAN A   idlb   Use this value to process HSR traffic for PRP Network 1 LAN B   id2a   Use this value to process HSR traffic for PRP Network 2 LAN A   id2b   Use this value to process HSR traffic for PRP Network 2 LAN B   id7a   Use this value to process HSR traffic for PRP Network 7 LAN A   id7b   Use this value
249. received any STP BPDUs  or the device port is not an edge port   enable   The device port is an edge port  terminal device port  and has  received an STP BPDU    The device deactivates the device port  In the Basic  Configuration Port Configuration dialog  the checkbox in the  Port  on  column is Not selected for this port        To reset the status of the device port to the value forwarding  you  proceed as follows     O    El    If the device port is still receiving BPDUs        On the  CIST  tab page  remove the selection from the checkbox  in the  Admin Edge Port  column   or       Inthe Redundancy Spanning Tree Global dialog  remove the  selection in the  BPDU Guard  checkbox    To activate the device port  in the Basic Configuration Port   Configuration dialog  select the checkbox in the  Port on  column for   this device port     Table 213   Guards  tab page in the Redundancy  Spanning Tree  Port dialog  section   x3c  tblsheetnum gt  of 3     Buttons    Button  Set    Reload    Help    Table 214  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS    Release 2 0 02 2013       Meaning    Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To    permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device     Opens the online help     237    Redundancy 7 4 Spanning Tree    RM GUI RSPS  238 Release 2 0 02 2013    Diagnostics    8 Diagnostics    Th
250. reely for any purpose  Any derived versions of this     software must be clearly marked as such  and if the derived work is    incompatible with the protocol description in the RFC file  it must be    called by a name other than  ssh  or  Secure Shell       Tatu continues      However    am not implying to give any licenses to any patents or     copyrights held by third parties  and the software includes parts that     are not under my direct control  As far as   know  all included     source code is used in accordance with the relevant license agreements    and can be used freely for any purpose  the GNU license being the most    restrictive   see below for details      However  none of that term is relevant at this point in time  All of these  restrictively licenced software components which he talks about have been  removed from OpenSSH  i e          RSA is no longer included  found in the OpenSSL library       IDEA is no longer included  its use is deprecated       DES is now external  in the OpenSSL library       GMP is no longer used  and instead we call BN code from OpenSSL      Zlib is now external  in a library       The make ssh known hosts script is no longer included       TSS has been removed       MD5 is now external  in the OpenSSL library       RC4 support has been replaced with ARC4 support from OpenSSL      Blowfish is now external  in the OpenSSL library    RM GUI RSPS  324 Release 2 0 02 2013    Appendix A 8 Copyright of Integrated Software     The licence
251. rity Status  In this mode the signal contact signals the overall status from the   Device Status  dialog and from the  Security Status  dialog   The  Status  frame shows the status        Table 280   Signal Contact Mode  frame in the Diagnostics Status  Configuration Signal Contact dialog       Trap Configuration    Parameters Meaning  Generate Trap Activates deactivates the sending of an SNMP message  trap  when an  event occurs that triggers the signal contact     Possible values   Selected  The device sends a trap   Not selected  default setting   The device does not send a trap     The prerequisite for sending SNMP messages  traps  is that the function  is switched on in the Diagnostics Alarms  Traps  dialog and atleast 1  SNMP manager is defined     Table 281  Trap Configuration  frame in the Diagnostics Status  Configuration Signal Contact dialog       RM GUI RSPS  292 Release 2 0 02 2013    Diagnostics 8 4 Status Configuration    Monitoring correct Operation    In this frame you define the parameters that the device monitors  The  device signals the occurrence of an event by opening the signal contact     Parameters Meaning  Contact Shows the status of the signal contact     Possible values   Opened  Error   An event has occurred that triggers the signal contact  The signal  contact is opened   Closed  OK   Normal status  The signal contact is closed     Temperature Defines whether the signal contact monitors the temperature in the device     Possible values    Ignore 
252. rms and save them in HTM    The log file is kept until a cold start is performed on  start the device creates the file again    To delete the logged events from the log file  click     Basic Settings Restart  dialog        L format on your PC   the device  After the cold    Delete Log File in the    Buttons   Button Meaning   Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Search Opens the  Search  dialog  The dialog allows you to search the log file for  search terms or regular expressions    Save Opens the  Save  dialog  The dialog allows you to save the log file in  HTML format on your PC    Delete Log File Removes the logged events from the log file    Help Opens the online help     Table 248  Buttons    264    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Diagnostics 8 2 Report    8 2 8 Audit Trail    The device logs system events and writing user actions on the device  This  gives you the option of following WHO changes WHAT on the device WHEN     The logged entries are write protected and remain saved in the device after  a cold reset     This dialog displays the log file  audit trail   The dialog allows you to search  the log file for search terms and save them in HTML format on your PC     The device logs the following user actions  among others   A user logging on via CLI  local or remote   A user logging off manually  Automatic logging off of a user in CLI after a specified period of inactivity  Device restart  Locking 
253. rt sends and receives PTP synchronization messages   Not selected  The device port blocks PTP synchronization messages   P2P Delay Interval Defines the interval in seconds at which the device port measures the   s  Peer to Peer delay   Prerequisite  You have set P2P on this device port and on the port of the  remote terminal  See the  Delay Mechanism  field     Possible values   1  default setting   2  4  8  16  32  P2P Delay Shows the measured Peer to Peer delay for the PTP synchronization  messages   Prerequisite  In the  Delay Mechanism  field you selected the value p2p   Asymmetry Corrects the measured delay value corrupted by asymmetrical  transmission paths     Possible values    2000000000   2000000000  default setting  0     The value represents the delay symmetry in nanoseconds    A measured delay value of x ns corresponds to an asymmetry of x 2 ns   The value is positive if the delay from the PTP master to the PTP slave is  longer than in the opposite direction     Table 122  Table in the Time  PTP  Transparent Clock  Port dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 143    Time 3 3 PTP    Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Help Opens the online help     Table 123  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  144 Re
254. rted  the device loads the configuration profile with the  settings of the existing device from the external memory  ENVM   The  device copies the settings into the volatile memory  RAM  and into the  non volatile memory  NVM      00 ogg          Note  The prerequisite for loading a configuration profile from the external  memory  ENVM  is that the  Config Priority  field in the Basic  Settings External Memory dialog has the value first    In the state on delivery  this value is preset              Cancels the configuration encryption in the device    O Enter the existing password in the  Remove  dialog    O Select the  Save Configuration afterwards  checkbox to also remove  the encryption for the  Selected  configuration profile in the non   volatile memory  NVM  and in the external memory  ENVM            Note  If you are keeping other configuration profiles in encrypted form in  the memory  the device prevents you afterwards from activating these  configuration profiles or designating them as  Selected      Table 25   Configuration Encryption  frame in the Basic Settings  Load Save dialog   section  x3c  tblsheetnum gt  of 2     42    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Basic Settings 1 4 Load Save    Information  Parameters Meaning  NVM synchron to Shows whether the configuration profile in the volatile memory  RAM  and  running config the  selected  configuration profile in the non volatile memory  NVM  are  the same     Possible values    Selected   The configuration pr
255. rwards the first frame to the VDANHs and discards the second frame when  it arrives     The device performs a specific role in the network  Configure a device as an  HSR RedBox connecting standard ethernet devices to an HSR ring  or as an  HSR node connecting a PRP LAN to an HSR ring     A single HSR ring accommodates up to 7 PRP LANs  Configure the device  to identify and tag the traffic addressed for the connected PRP LAN     Note  HSR is available for devices with enhanced redundancy hardware  In  order to use the HSR functions  load the HSR device software  HiOS 2S   xxXxX RSPS 02000 bin where xxx HSR      RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 215    Redundancy 7 3 HSR    A WARNING    RING LOOP HAZARD    To avoid loops during the configuration phase  configure all the devices  individually  Before you connect the redundant line  be sure to complete the  configuration of all the devices     Failure to follow these instructions can result in death  serious injury   or equipment damage        The menu contains the following dialogs   Configuration  DAN VDAN Table  Proxy Node Table  Statistics    7 3 1 Configuration    With this dialog you activate or deactivate the HSR Protocol  manage HSR  supervision packets  and configure the device for a specific network role     MRP and STP cannot operate on the same ports as HSR  Deactivate or  choose different ports for MRP and deactivate STP on the HSR ports     Note  HSR uses interfaces 1 1 and 1 2 when active  The HSR function  replaces
256. ry to overflow  This happens  for example  when the  device receives data at a Gigabit port and forwards it to a port with a lower  bandwidth  The device discards surplus data packets     The flow control mechanism described in standard IEEE 802 3 ensures that  no data packets are lost due to a port memory overflowing  Shortly before a  port memory is completely full  the device signals to the connected devices  that it is not accepting any more data packets from them    In full duplex mode  the device sends a pause data packet    In half duplex mode  the device simulates a collision     Then the connected devices do not send any more data packets for as long  as the signaling takes  On uplink ports  this can possibly cause undesired  sending breaks in the higher level network segment     wandering  backpressure         According to standard IEEE 802 1Q  the device forwards data packets with  a VLAN tag in a VLAN 21  However  a small number of applications on  connected terminal devices send or receive data packets with a VLAN ID 0   When the device receives one of these data packets  before forwarding it the  device overwrites the original value in the data packet with the VLAN ID of  the receiving port  When you switch on the VLAN Unaware Mode  this  deactivates the VLAN settings in the device  The device then transparently  forwards the data packets on all ports and only evaluates the priority  information contained in the data packet     RM GUI RSPS  152 Release 2 0 02 20
257. s     Possible values     1  IGMP v1    2  IGMP v2  default setting    3  IGMP v3   Max Response Shows the time in seconds in which the members of a Multicast group  Time should respond to a query data packet  For their response  the members    select a random time within the response time  This helps to prevent all the  Multicast group members from responding to the query at the same time   In the  Max Response Time  field  select a value smaller than the value in  the  Group Membership Interval  field     Possible values   1  25  default setting  10     Last Querier Shows the IP address of the Multicast router from which the last received  Address IGMP query was sent out    Last Querier Shows the IGMP protocol version that the Multicast router used when  Version sending out the last IGMP query received in this VLAN     Table 150  Table in the switching  IGMP  Querier dialog  cont      Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Help Opens the online help     Table 151  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  174 Release 2 0 02 2013    Switching 5 4 IGMP    5 4 4 Multicasts    The device allows you to specify how it transmits data packets with unknown  Multicast addresses  Either the device discards these data packets  floods 
258. s before  they login to the device     The users see this text in the login dialog of the graphical user interface  GUI   and of the Command Line Interface  CLI   Users logging in with SSH see the  text   regardless of the client used   before or during the login     To display the text only in the Command Line Interface  CLI   you use the  settings in the Security Management Access CLI dialog        Operation  Parameters Meaning  Operation When this function is switched on  the device shows a greeting or    information text in the login dialog of the graphical user interface  GUI  and  of the Command Line Interface  CLI      Possible values    off  default setting    The device does not show a text in the login dialog  If you entered a  text in the  Banner Text  field  this text is kept    On   The device shows the text specified in the  Banner Text  field in the  login dialog              Table 88   Operation  frame in the Security  Pre login Banner dialog       RM GUI RSPS  108 Release 2 0 02 2013    Security    2 6 Pre login Banner    Banner Text    Parameters  Banner Text    Remaining  Characters    Meaning    Specifies the greeting or information text that the device displays in the  login dialog of the graphical user interface  GUI  and of the Command Line  Interface  CLI      Possible values   Maximum 512 alphanumeric characters  including spaces  tabs  line breaks and the following special  characters   1    amp             lt   gt   M    Shows how many characters ar
259. s detailed  information that you require to select the suitable redundancy procedure and  configure it     The menu contains the following dialogs   MRP  PRP  HSR  Spanning Tree    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 201    Redundancy 7 1 MRP    7 1 MRP    The MRP  Media Redundancy Protocol  is a protocol that enables you to set  up high availability  ring shaped network structures  An MRP Ring is made  up of up to 50 devices that support the MRP protocol according to IEC 62439     The ring structure of an MRP Ring changes back into a line structure if a  section fails  The maximum switching time can be configured     The Ring Manager function of the device enables the ends of a backbone in  a line structure to be closed to a redundant ring     Note  The devices with hardware for enhanced redundancy functions offer  the delay times 30ms and 10ms  In order to use these delay times  load the  Fast MRP device software  HiOS 2S xxx RSPS 02000 bin where  xXX MRP      Note  For all devices in an MRP Ring  activate the MRP compatibility in the  Redundancy Spanning Tree Global dialog if you want to use RSTP in  the MRP Ring  If this is not possible  perhaps because individual devices do  not support the MRP compatibility  you deactivate the Spanning Tree  protocol on the ports connected to the MRP Ring  Spanning Tree and Ring  Redundancy affect each other     Note  If you combine RSTP with an MRP Ring  you must give the devices in  the MRP Ring a better  i e  numerically lower  RSTP bri
260. s of the device ports   Traffic class 3     queue with medium priority  Traffic class 0     queue with the lowest priority    Table 173  Table in the QoS Priority 802 1D p Mapping dialog    DSCP Value DSCP Name Traffic class  0 Best Effort  CSO 1  1 7 1  8 CS1 0  9 11 13 15 0  10 12 14 AF11 AF12 AF13 0  16 CS2 0  17 19 21 23 0  18 20 22 AF21 AF22 AF23 0  24 CS3 1  25 27 29 31 1  26 28 30 AF31 AF32 AF33 1  32 CS4 2  33 35 37 39 2    Table 174  Default assignment of the DSCP values to the traffic classes    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 197    QoS Priority    DSCP Value  34 36 38   40  41 42 43 44 45 47  46   48   49 55   56   57 63    DSCP Name  AF41 AF42 AF43  CS5    EF  CS6    CS7    6 4 IP DSCP Mapping    Traffic class    WW  WW  WIM  NM  NM  PM    Table 174  Default assignment of the DSCP values to the traffic classes  cont      Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Help Opens the online help     Table 175  Buttons    198    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    QoS Priority 6 5 Queue Management    6 5 Queue Management    With this dialog you can activate deactivate the  Strict Priority  function for  the traffic classes  When the  Strict Priority  function is switched off  the  device controls the pro
261. s shorter delay time     Table 180   Configuration  frame in the Redundancy  MRP dialog    204    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Redundancy    Parameters  VLAN ID    7 1 MRP    Meaning    Defines the ID of the VLAN to which the MRP Ring configuration is  assigned     Possible values    0  default setting    The MRP Ring configuration is not assigned to any VLAN    Define the following settings for the ring ports        VLAN ID 1       For this VLAN ID you assign the port the value U in the  Switching VLAN  Static dialog    1  4042   The MRP Ring configuration is assigned to a VLAN    Define the same VLAN ID for all the devices in the ring    Define the following settings for the ring ports        VLAN ID as defined here        For this VLAN ID you assign the port the value T in the  Switching VLAN  Static dialog     Table 180  Configuration  frame in the Redundancy  MRP dialog  cont      Information  Parameters Meaning  Information Shows messages for the redundancy configuration and the possible    causes of errors     The following messages are possible if the device is operating as a ring  client or a ring manager   Redundancy Available  The redundancy is set up  When a component of the ring is down  the  redundant line takes over its function   Configuration error  Ring port link error  Error in the cabling of the ring ports              The following messages are possible if the device is operating as a ring  manager   Configuration error  Packet of other ring manage
262. s to normal time when the time in the  System Time   field reaches the value entered here     Parameters Meaning  Week Defines the week in the current month     Possible values    none  state on delivery   first   second   third   forth   last    Day Defines the day of the week              Possible values    none  state on delivery   sun  mon  THS  wed  thu  Fr  sat          Table 95   Summertime End  frame in the Time Basic Settings dialog   Daylight  Saving Time  tab page    RM GUI RSPS  116 Release 2 0 02 2013    Time 3 1 Basic Settings    Parameters Meaning  Month Defines the month     Possible values   none  state on delivery   jan   feb   mar   apr   mai   jun   jul   aug   sep   oct   nov   dec    Systemtime Defines the time        Possible values   00 00  state on delivery    lt HH   MM gt     Table 95   Summertime End  frame in the Time Basic Settings dialog   Daylight  Saving Time  tab page  cont      Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Help Opens the online help     Table 96  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 117    Time 3 2 SNTP    3 2 SNTP    SNTP  Simple Network Time Protocol  is a procedure described in the RFC  4330 for time synchronization in the network     The device allows 
263. s to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save      Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device     Adds a new table entry   Removes the selected table entry   Opens the online help     With this dialog you can define settings for the graphical user interface  Web   based interface      Configuration    Parameters  Web Interface  Session Timeout   min     Meaning    Defines the timeout in minutes  After the device has been inactive for this  time it ends the session for the user logged on     Possible values   0   160  default setting  5     The value 0 deactivates the function  and the user remains logged on  when inactive     Table 69   Configuration  frame in the Security Management Access Web dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    91    Security    Buttons    Button  Set    Reload    Help    Table 70  Buttons    2 3 10 CLI    2 3 Management Access    Meaning   Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save      Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device     Opens the online help     With this dialog you can define settings for the Command Line Interface   CLI   You will find detailed information on the Command Line Interface in the     
264. seconds and waits for the time specified in the  Detection  Delay  ms   field for a response        Ifthe device detects an address conflict  it applies the passive  detection mode function  If the  Send Trap  function is switched  on  it sends an SNMP message  trap     Off   The continuous address conflict detection is switched off     Detection Delay Defines the period in milliseconds for which the device waits for a   ms  response after sending an ARP data packet              Possible values   20   500  default setting  200   Release Delay  s  Defines the period in seconds after which the device checks again  whether the address conflict still exists     Possible values   3   3600  default setting  15   Number of Address Defines how often the device sends gratuitous ARP data packets in the  Protections passive detection mode to    defend    its IP address     Possible values   0   100  default setting  3     Protection Defines the period in milliseconds after which the device sends gratuitous  Interval  ms  ARP data packets again in the passive detection mode to    defend    its IP  address     Possible values   20  5000  default setting  200     Send Trap Activates deactivates the sending of an SNMP message  trap  when the  device detects an address conflict during the periodic address conflict  detection     Possible values   Selected  The device sends an SNMP message   Not selected  default setting   The device does not send an SNMP message     The prerequisite for send
265. servers   Defines the interval in seconds at which the device requests time  information from the SNTP server     Possible values   5  3600  default setting  30     Defines whether the device disables the SNTP client when it has  successfully synchronized the time     Possible values   Selected  The device deactivates the SNTP client after successful  synchronization   Not selected  default setting   The SNTP client remains activated after successful synchronization     Table 98   Configuration  frame in the Time  SNTP Client dialog    State    Parameters  Status    Meaning  Shows the status of the SNTP client     Possible values   disabled  The SNTP client is disabled   notSynchronized  The SNTP client is not synchronized with any SNTP or NTP server   syncToRemoteserver  The SNTP client is synchronized with an SNTP or NTP server     Table 99   State  frame in the Time  SNTP Client dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    119    Time    Table    3 2 SNTP    In the table you define the settings for up to 4 SNTP servers     Parameters  Index    Description    Address    Target UDP Port    Meaning  Shows a sequential number to which the table entry relates     Possible values   Te eA    The device automatically defines this number   When you delete a table entry  this leaves a gap in the numbering  When  you create a new table entry  the device fills the first gap     After starting  the device sends requests to the SNTP server configured in  the first table entry  If the s
266. smitting the PTP synchronization messages     disabled   The measurement of the delay for the PTP synchronization messages  for the connected PTP devices is deactivated    e2e  default setting    End to end  As the PTP slave  the device port measures the delay for  the PTP synchronization messages to the PTP master    The device displays the measured value in the Time  PTP  Boundary  Clock Global dialog    p2p   Peer to peer  The device measures the delay for the PTP  synchronization messages for all the connected PTP devices   provided that these devices support P2P    This mechanism saves the device from having to determine the delay  again if there is a reconfiguration     Shows the measured Peer to Peer delay for the PTP synchronization  messages   Prerequisite  In the  Delay Mechanism  field you selected the value p2p     Table 116  Table in the Time  PTP Boundary Clock  Port dialog  section   x3c   tblsheetnum gt  of 4     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    135    Time    Parameters    P2P Delay Interval   s     Network Protocol    Announce  Interval  s     Announce Timeout    E2E Delay Interval   s     3 3 PTP    Meaning   Defines the interval in seconds at which the device port measures the  Peer to Peer delay    Prerequisite  You have set P2P at this device port and at the port of the  remote terminal  See the  Delay Mechanism  field     Possible values    1  default setting    2   4   8   16   32  Defines which protocol the device port uses to transmit the PTP  syn
267. summertime  The profile selected overwrites  the settings in the  Summertime Begin  and  Summertime End  frames     Table 93   Operation  frame in the Time Basic Settings dialog   Daylight Saving  Time  tab page    RM GUI RSPS  114 Release 2 0 02 2013    Time 3 1 Basic Settings    Summertime Begin    In the first 3 fields you define the day for the beginning of summertime   and in the last field the time     The devices switches to summertime when the time in the  System Time   field reaches the value entered here     Parameters Meaning  Week Defines the week in the current month     Possible values    none  state on delivery   first   second   third   forth   last    Day Defines the day of the week              Possible values   none  state on delivery   sun  mon  Tue  wed  thu  FETI  sat  Month Defines the month           Possible values   none  state on delivery   jan   feb   mar   apr   mai   jun   jul   aug   sep   oct   nov   dec       Table 94   Summertime Begin  frame in the Time Basic Settings dialog   Daylight  Saving Time  tab page    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 115    Time 3 1 Basic Settings    Parameters Meaning  Systemtime Defines the time     Possible values   00 00  state on delivery    lt HH   MM gt     Table 94   Summertime Begin  frame in the Time Basic Settings dialog   Daylight  Saving Time  tab page  cont      Summertime End    In the first 3 fields you define the day for the end of summertime  and in  the last field the time     The devices switche
268. t   lt path gt   lt file name gt    SCP or SFTP upload   If the key is on an SCP or SFTP server  you enter the URL for the file   in the following form        scp   orsftp    lt IP address gt   lt path gt   lt file name gt   When you click  Import      the device displays the   Authentication  window  There you enter the  User  and   Password  to login to the server        scp   orsftp    lt user gt   lt password gt   lt IP  address gt   lt path gt   lt file name gt    Shows the  Open  dialog  Here you select the key to be copied if the file  is located on your PC or on a network drive     Copies the key  host key  defined in the  File  field to the device                                To get the server to use this key  you click  Set  and restart the server     Table 62   Key Import  frame in the Security Management Access Server dialog    SSH  tab page    Buttons    Button  Set    Reload    Help    Meaning   Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Opens the online help     Table 63  Buttons    86    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Security 2 3 Management Access    2 3 7 SNMPv1 v2 Community    With this dialog you can define the community name for SNMPv1 v2  applications     Applications send requests via SNMPv1 v2 with a community name in
269. t path gt   lt file name gt    Shows the  Open  dialog  Here you select the certificate file to be copied  if the file is located on your PC or on a network drive     Copies the certificate defined in the  File  field to the device                                To get the server to use this certificate  you click  Set  and restart the  server  You can only restart the server via the Command Line Interface   CLI      Table 56   Certificate Import  frame in the Security Management Access Server  dialog   HTTPS  tab page    Buttons    Button  Set    Reload    Help    Meaning   Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Opens the online help     Table 57  Buttons    82    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Security 2 3 Management Access    2 3 6 Server  SSH    This tab allows you to switch the SSH server on off in the device and define  its settings     The server works with SSH version 2  The SSH server enables access to the  management functions of the device with the Command Line Interface via an  encrypted connection  secure shell      The SSH server identifies itself to the clients using its public RSA or DSA key   When first setting up the connection  the client program shows the user the  fingerprint of this key  The fingerprint contains a hex
270. tarted you have  access to the log entries     With this dialog you can limit the size of the log file and define the minimum  severity for the events to be saved  If the log file attains the specified size  the  device archives this file and saves the following log entries in a newly created  file     In the table the device shows you the log files held on the external memory   As soon as the specified maximum number of files has been attained  the  device deletes the oldest file and renames the remaining files  This ensures  that there is always enough memory space on the external memory     Operation  Parameters Meaning  Operation When the function is switched on  the device saves the log entries in a file    on the external memory     Possible values   On  default setting   Off             Only activate this function when the external memory is available on the  device     Table 241   Operation  frame in the Diagnostics Report Persistent Logging  dialog    RM GUI RSPS  260 Release 2 0 02 2013    Diagnostics 8 2 Report    Configuration  Parameters Meaning  Max File Size Defines the maximum size of the log file in KBytes  If the log file attains the    specified size  the device archives this file and saves the following log  entries in a newly created file     Possible values   0   4096  default setting  1024     The value 0 deactivates saving of log entries in the log file     Max Files Defines the number of log files that the device keeps on the external  memory   As soo
271. ters Meaning  Port A The text box in this frame shows the port number that is operating as PRP    Port B    Port A on this device   The radio buttons activate deactivate the PRP function on port A     Possible values    On  default setting    OF  The text box in this frame shows the port number that is operating as PRP  Port B on this device              The radio buttons activate deactivate the PRP function on port B     Possible values   On  default setting   OFT             Table 184   Port A   Port B  frame in the Redundancy  PRP  Configuration dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    209    Redundancy 7 2 PRP    Supervision Packet Receiver    Parameters Meaning   Evaluate Activates deactivates Supervision Packets analysis   Supervision   Packets Possible values     Selected  default setting    Supervision Packets analysis is switched on    The device receives Supervision Frames and analyzes them    Not selected   Supervision Packets analysis is switched off    The device still receives Supervision Frames without analyzing them     Table 185   Supervision Packet Receiver  frame in the  Redundancy  PRP  Configuration dialog    Supervision Packet Transmitter    Parameters Meaning  Active Activates deactivates the transmission of Supervision Packets     Possible values    On  default setting    Transmission of Supervision Packets is activated  The RedBox  transmits its own Supervision Packets              Off   Transmission of Supervision Packets is deactivated   Send V
272. tes the security status if you have selected  the  Security Status  option field in the  Signal Contact Mode  frame     Parameters  Contact    Meaning  Shows the status of the signal contact  The signal contact indicates the  device status or the security status     Possible values    Opened  Error    The signal contact is opened        The current status of the device has the value Error   or       The current status of the security relevant settings in the device  has the value Error    Closed  OK    Normal status  The signal contact is closed              Table 284  Status  frame in the Diagnostics Status Configuration Signal  Contact dialog          Propagate Connection Error    table    Parameters   Port   Propagate  Connection Error    Meaning  Shows the number of the device port to which the table entry relates     Defines whether the signal contact monitors the link status of the device  port     Possible values   Selected  The signal contact opens if the link on this device port is interrupted   Not selected  default setting   The signal contact remains closed if the link on this device port is  interrupted     This setting is only effective if you have selected the value Monitor in the   Connection error  field of the  Monitoring correct Operation  frame     Table 285   Propagate Connection Error  table in the Diagnostics Status  Configuration Signal Contact dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013       295    Diagnostics 8 4 Status Configuration       Propagate 
273. th multiple ports  To avoid this  alarm  you deactivate the monitoring of the missing power supply units in  the Diagnostics Status Configuration Device Status dialog           RM GUI RSPS  22 Release 2 0 02 2013    Basic Settings 1 1 System    Security Status    The fields in this frame show the security status and inform you about  alarms that have occurred  You define the parameters that the device  monitors in the Diagnostics Status Configuration Security Status  dialog        Parameters Meaning  Symbol Shows the security status     Possible values   The device status is OK  The monitored parameters have the  desired status   An alarm has occurred  At least one monitored parameter differs  x from the desired status   Alarm Start Time Shows the time at which the device triggered the alarm with the current  highest priority     Possible values   Date and time in the format Month  Day  Year hh mm ss  AM  PM     The device triggers an alarm if a monitored parameter differs from the  desired status  In the Diagnostics Status Configuration Security  Status dialog  the parameters are sorted by priority  High priority at the  top  low priority at the bottom     Alarm Reason Shows the cause of the alarm and the current highest priority     Table 4   Security Status  frame in the Basic Settings System dialog    System Data    The fields in this frame show operating data and information on the  location of the device     Parameters Meaning  Name Defines the device name     Possible 
274. the SNTP packet  the SNTP server  informs the clients that it is synchronized locally   Not selected  default setting   The SNTP Broadcast server remains active when the device is  synchronized to the local clock     Table 103  Configuration  frame in the Time  SNTP Server dialog  cont      124    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Time 3 2 SNTP    State  Parameters Meaning  State Shows the state of the SNTP server     Possible values   disabled  The SNTP server is deactivated   notSynchronized  The SNTP server is not synchronized with either a local or an external  reference clock   syncToLocal  The SNTP server is synchronized with the hardware clock of the  device   syncToRefclock  The SNTP server is synchronized with an external reference clock   e g  PTP   yncToRemoteserver  The SNTP server is synchronized with an SNTP server that is higher  than the device in a cascade                          Table 104  State  frame in the Time  SNTP Client dialog    Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Help Opens the online help     Table 105  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 125    Time 3 3 PTP    3 3 PTP    PTP  Precision Time Protocol  is a procedure described in the IEEE 1588   2008 standard that su
275. the above copyright notice   this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation  and or other materials provided with the distribution         Neither the name of the    incremental    nor the names of its contributors  may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software  without specific prior written permission     THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND  CONTRIBUTORS  AS IS  AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED  WARRANTIES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED TO  THE IMPLIED  WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA  PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE  COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY  DIRECT  INDIRECT  INCIDENTAL  SPECIAL  EXEMPLARY  OR  CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED TO   PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES  LOSS OF  USE  DATA  OR PROFITS  OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION  HOWEVER    RM GUI RSPS  320 Release 2 0 02 2013    Appendix A 8 Copyright of Integrated Software    CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY  WHETHER IN  CONTRACT  STRICT LIABILITY  OR TORT  INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE  OR OTHERWISE  ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS  SOFTWARE  EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH  DAMAGE    A 8 2 Expat    Copyright  c  1998  1999  2000  Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd and Clark Cooper    Copyright  c  2001  2002  2003  2004  2005  2006  Expat maintainers     Permission is hereby granted  free of charge  to any person obtaining a copy  of this software and asso
276. the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Reset Resets the port monitor function for the selected interface and enables the  port when disabled by the Port Monitor function    Help Opens the online help     Table 261  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  274 Release 2 0 02 2013    Diagnostics 8 3 Ports    8 3 8 Auto Disable    If the configuration shows a port as enabled  but the device detects an error   the software shuts down that port  In other words  the device software  disables the port because of a detected error condition     When a port is auto disabled  the device effectively shuts down the port and  the port blocks traffic  The port LED blinks green 1 time per period and  identifies the reason for the shutdown  In addition  the device generates a log  entry listing the reason for the auto disable  Furthermore  the device sends a  trap with the interface number  the port status  and the reason to the  administrator  When you enable the port after a timeout by auto disable  the  device sends a trap with the interface number and an empty  Reason  entry     This feature provides a recovery function which automatically enables an  auto disabled port after a user defined time  When this function enables a  port  the device sends a trap with the interface number and an empty   Reason  entry     The auto disable function serves 2 purp
277. the data packets        The device transmits the data packets based on their destination  MAC address or destination IP address in the corresponding VLAN        The device evaluates the priority information contained in the data  packet    Selected   The device works in the VLAN Unaware bridging mode  802 1D         The device ignores the VLAN settings in the device and the VLAN  tags in the data packets  The device transmits the data packets  based on their destination MAC address or destination IP address  in VLAN 1        The device ignores the VLAN settings defined in the  Switching VLAN Static and Switching  VLAN  Port dialogs  All the  device ports are assigned to VLAN 1        The device evaluates the priority information contained in the data  packet     Note  You specify the VLAN ID 1 for all the functions in the device that  use VLAN settings  Among other things  this applies to static filters   MRP and IGMP Snooping     Table 128  Configuration  frame in the switching Global dialog  cont         Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Help Opens the online help     Table 129  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  154 Release 2 0 02 2013    Switching 5 2 Rate Limiter    5 2 Rate Limiter    The device allows you 
278. the management functions of the  device     Possible values   Selected  The user   s access is locked   The device automatically locks a user if the user makes too many  unsuccessful login attempts   Not selected  The user   s access is unlocked     Defines whether the device checks the password according to the defined  policy when it is being set up or changed     Possible values   Selected  The device checks the password according to the policy defined in the   Password Policy  frame   Not selected  The device accepts the password without checking it   Defines the authentication protocol that the device applies for user access  via SNMPvs3     Possible values   hmacmd5  For this user account  the device uses protocol HMAC MDB5   hmacsha  For this user account  the device uses protocol HMAC SHA     Table 38  Table in the Security User Management dialog  section   x3c  tblsheetnum gt  of 3     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    65    Security    Parameters    SNMP Encryption  Type    2 1 User Management    Meaning  Defines the encryption protocol that the device applies for user access via  SNMPVv3     Possible values     none   No encryption   des   DES encryption  aesCfb128  AES 128 encryption       Table 38  Table in the security User Management dialog  section   x3c  tblsheetnum gt  of 3     New Entry    In this frame you set up a new user account  To display the frame  you  click the  Create  button     Parameters  User Name    Active    Meaning  Specifies the name of 
279. the user account     Possible values     1  32 alphanumeric characters    Activates deactivates the user account     Possible values     Selected   The user account is active  The user accepts the login of a user with  this user name    Not selected   The user account is inactive  The user rejects the login of a user with  this user name     Table 39   New Entry  frame in the Security User Management dialog  section   x3c  tblsheetnum gt  of 3     66    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Security 2 1 User Management    Parameters Meaning    Password Specifies the password with which the user logs in   When the checkbox in the  Display Password  field is selected  the  password is visible in clear text     Possible values   6  64 alphanumeric characters  including the following special characters   1    amp     4        lt   gt   M       The minimum length of the password is defined in the  Password Policy   frame  The device differentiates between upper and lower case     When the checkbox in the  Policy Check  field is selected  the device  checks the password according to the policy defined in the  Password  Policy  frame     The device always checks the minimum length of the password  even if  the checkbox in the  Policy Check  field is not selected     Display Password Specifies how the adjacent  Password  field displays the password     Possible values   Not selected  default setting   The  Password  field displays      asterisks  instead of the password   Selected  The
280. tion  still has access to the device after the VLAN configuration is saved   Connect the management station to a port that is a member of the VLAN  that is selected as the management VLAN  In the state on delivery  the  device transmits the management data in VLAN 1     The device automatically creates VLANs for MRP rings  The MRP ring  function prevents the deletion of these VLANs   Note the tagging settings for ports that are part of a redundant ring     Note  In a redundant ring with VLANs  you should only operate devices  whose software version supports VLANs     Buttons    Button  Set    Table 160  Buttons    182    Meaning   Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save      RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Switching 5 5 VLAN    Button Meaning   Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Create Adds a new table entry    Remove Removes the selected table entry    Help Opens the online help     Table 160  Buttons  cont      5 5 4 Port    In this dialog you specify how the device handles received data packets that  have no VLAN tag  or whose VLAN tag differs from the VLAN ID of the port     This dialog allows you to assign a VLAN to the device ports and thus define  the port VLAN ID   Additionally  you also define for each device port how the device transmits  data packets when the VL
281. tions  please contact any Hirschmann dealer in your  area or Hirschmann directly     You will find the addresses of our partners on the Internet at  http   Awww hirschmann com    Contact our support at  https   hirschmann support belden eu com    You can contact us    in the EMEA region at  Tel    49  0 1805 14 1538  E mail  hac support belden com    in the America region at  Tel    1  717  217 2270  E mail  inet support us belden com    in the Asia Pacific region at  Tel    65 6854 9860  E mail  inet ap belden com    Hirschmann Competence Center  The Hirschmann Competence Center is ahead of its competitors     Consulting incorporates comprehensive technical advice  from system  evaluation through network planning to project planning    Training offers you an introduction to the basics  product briefing and  user training with certification    The current technology and product training courses can be found at  http   www hicomcenter com   Support ranges from the first installation through the standby service  to maintenance concepts     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 345    Further Support    With the Hirschmann Competence Center  you have decided against  making any compromises  Our client customized package leaves you  free to choose the service components you want to use    Internet    http   www hicomcenter com    RM GUI RSPS  346 Release 2 0 02 2013    Further Support    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 347     fh  HIRSCHMANN    A BELDEN BRAND    
282. to limit the traffic on the ports in order to ensure  reliable operation even with a large traffic volume  If the traffic on a port  exceeds the traffic value entered  the device discards the excess traffic on  this port     The rate limiter function operates exclusively on layer 2  and is used to limit  the effects of storms of data packets that flood the device  typically  Broadcasts      The rate limiter function ignores protocol information on higher levels  such  as IP or TCP  With the following measures you reduce the effects on  for  example  the TCP traffic   Restricting the rate limiter function to specific data packets  e g  to  Broadcasts  Multicasts and Unicasts with an unknown destination  address  Excluding Unicasts with a known destination address from this  restriction   Using the egress limiter function instead of the ingress limiter function   The egress limiter function works somewhat better with the TCP flow  control due to the device internal buffering of the data packets   Increasing the aging time for learned Unicast addresses     The dialog contains the following tabs   Ingress  Egress    Ingress    On this tab you activate the rate limiter function for received data packets   By entering a threshold value you define the maximum amount of traffic  the port transmits on the ingress side  If the traffic on this port exceeds the  threshold value  the device discards the excess traffic on this port     Parameters Meaning  Port Shows the number of the devic
283. tp    lt user gt   lt password gt   lt IP  address gt   lt path gt   lt file name gt              Table 29  Buttons  section  x3c  tblsheetnum gt  of 5     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    49    Basic Settings    Button  Import       View       Save As       1 4 Load Save    Meaning  Imports a configuration profile saved in XML format from a PC or from a  server in the network   You specify the storage location for the configuration profile to be  imported in the  Storage Type  field   You specify the name of the configuration profile to be imported in the   Name  field     The device gives you the following options for importing a configuration  profile   File upload  If the file is located on your PC or on a network drive  click       select the file there   TFTP upload  If the file is located on a TFTP server  enter the URL for the file in the  following form    tftp    lt IP address gt   lt path gt   lt file name gt    SCP or SFTP upload   If the file is located on an SCP or SFTP server  enter the URL for the   file in one of the following forms        scp   orsftp    lt IP address gt   lt path gt   lt file name gt   When you click  Update   the device displays the  Authentication   dialog  There you enter the  User  and  Password  to login to the  server        scp   orsftp    lt user gt   lt password gt   lt IP  address gt   lt path gt   lt file name gt     and                               If the configuration encryption is inactive  the device imports the  configur
284. try     Possible values   Selected  The device sends an email alert to the user defined email address   Not selected  default setting     Table 237  Table in the Diagnostics Report Email Logging Addresses dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013       257    Diagnostics 8 2 Report    8 2 4 Syslog    The device enables you to send specific logged events to one or more syslog  servers  In this dialog you define the settings for this     The dialog manages a list of up to 8 syslog server entries  Depending on the  severity of the event  the device sends the log entry to different syslog  servers     Operation  Parameters Meaning  Operation When the function is switched on  the device sends the events specified    in the table to the specified syslog servers     Possible values   On  off  default setting              Table 238  Operation  frame in the Diagnostics Report Syslog dialog    Table  Parameters Meaning  Index Shows a sequential number to which the table entry relates   The device automatically defines this number   When you delete a table entry  this leaves a gap in the numbering  When  you create a new table entry  the device fills the first gap   Possible values   13 38  IP Address Defines the IP address of the syslog server   Possible values   Valid IP address  default setting  0 0 0 0   Port Defines the UDP Port on which the syslog server expects the log entries     Possible values   1  65535  default setting  514     Table 239  Table in the Diagnostics Report Sys
285. ts    Parameters Meaning   Link Flap Count Defines the link flap detection counter for this entry   When the frequency of link flaps reaches this number  the device  produces the action configured in the  Global  tab   Prerequisite for this function is that the  Link Flap on  checkbox in the   Global  tab is selected     Possible values   1  100  default setting  5     Last Sampling Shows the link flap count that occurred during the last interval   Interval  Total Shows the total link flap count since the last reset     Table 258  Table in the  Link Flap  tab of the Diagnostics Ports Port Monitor       dialog  cont    Buttons  Button Meaning  Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To    permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save      Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Reset Resets the port monitor function for the selected interface and enables the  port when disabled by the Port Monitor function    Help Opens the online help     Table 259  Buttons    8 3 7 Port Monitor  CRC Fragments    In this dialog  you configure the device to monitor the Cyclical Redundancy  Check  CRC  and Fragmentation  The CRC is a code added to the data to   detect accidental changes in the raw data  Fragmentation occurs when the  Maximum Transmission Unit  MTU  of a port is smaller than the packet size   The sending device divides the packet
286. ts VoIP devices via Link Layer Discovery Protocol   Media  Endpoint Discovery  LLDP MED   The device then adds the appropriate  switch port to the member set of the configured Voice VLAN  The member  set is either a tagged or an untagged member  Tagging depends on the Voice  VLAN interface mode  VLAN ID  Dot1p  None  Untagged      Another benefit of the Voice VLAN feature is that the VOIP device obtains  VLAN ID or priority information via LLDP MED from the switch  As a result   the phone sends voice data tagged as priority  or untagged depending on the  configured Voice VLAN Interface mode  You configure the switch to support  Voice VLAN on a port that is connecting to the VOIP phone     Operation  Parameters Meaning  Operation Activates deactivates the Voice VLAN function globally on the device     Possible values   On  Off  default setting              Table 163  Operation  frame in the Switching  VLAN  Voice dialog       RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 185    Switching    Table    Parameters  Port  Voice VLAN Mode    Data Priority Mode    Status    VLAN ID    5 5 VLAN    Meaning  Shows the number of the device port to which the table entry relates     Defines whether the port transmits or discards received data packets  without Voice VLAN tagging or data packets with Voice VLAN priority  information     Possible values   disable  default setting   Disables the Voice VLAN function for this table entry   none  Allows the IP phone to use its own configuration to send untagg
287. ue  none  in the VLAN field  the device ignores  the VLAN priority     Table 116  Table in the Time  PTP Boundary Clock  Port dialog  section   x3c  tblsheetnum gt  of 4     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 137    Time    Buttons    Button  Set    Reload    Help    Table 117  Buttons    3 3 PTP    Meaning   Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Opens the online help     3 3 5 Transparent Clock    With this menu you can configure the Transparent Clock mode for the local    clock     The menu contains the following dialogs   Transparent clock  Global  Transparent clock  Port    138    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Time 3 3 PTP    3 3 6 Transparent clock  Global    With this dialog you can enter general  cross port settings for the  Transparent Clock mode for the local clock  The Transparent Clock  BC   operates according to PTP version 2  IEEE 1588 2008      The settings are effective when the local clock operates as the Transparent  Clock  TC   For this  you select the value v2 transparent clock in the   PTP Version Mode  field in the Time  PTP Global dialog     Operation IEEE 1588 PTPv2 TC    Parameters Meaning    Delay Defines the mechanism with which the device measures the delay for  Mechanism transmitting the PTP synchronization mess
288. uration  frame in the Security Management Access  Server dialog    SNMP  tab page  cont      Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Help Opens the online help     Table 46  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 75    Security 2 3 Management Access    2 3 3 Server  Telnet  This tab allows you to define settings for the Telnet server of the device and  to switch the server on off     The Telnet server enables access to the management functions of the device  with the Command Line Interface via a Telnet connection     Operation  Parameters Meaning  Operation If the function is switched on  the Telnet server is activated     Possible values   Off   Server is deactivated    On  default setting    Server is activated  You can access the management functions of the    device via Telnet              Table 47   Operation  frame in the Security Management Access Server dialog    Telnet  tab page    Configuration    Parameters Meaning    Listen TCP Port Defines the number of the TCP port from which the server receives  requests from clients     Possible values   1  65535  default setting  23   Exception  Port 2222 is reserved for internal functions     The server restarts automatically after the port is changed 
289. urn on the function in  the Diagnostics Status Configuration Alarms  Traps  dialog and  you define at least 1 SNMP manager     Shows the status of the port     Possible values   up  down  notPresent    Table 256  Table in the  Global  tab of the Diagnostics  Ports Port Monitor dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013       271    Diagnostics 8 3 Ports    Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Reset Resets the port monitor function for the selected interface and enables the  port when disabled by the Port Monitor function    Help Opens the online help     Table 257  Buttons    8 3 6 Port Monitor  Link Flap    Link Flapping occurs when a link alternately advertises its link state as up and  down  You configure the device to detect this condition and then define  whether to send a trap or shut the port off     Table  Parameters Meaning  Port Shows the number of the device port to which the table entry relates   Sampling Defines the interval  in seconds  for link flap detection for this entry   Interval  s     Possible values   1  180  default setting  10     Table 258  Table in the  Link Flap  tab of the Diagnostics  Ports Port Monitor  dialog       RM GUI RSPS  272 Release 2 0 02 2013    Diagnostics 8 3 Por
290. user interface  GUI    Shows the version number of the logic module for devices with  programmable hardware  FPGA      Table 22  Table in the Basic Settings Software dialog     Buttons    Button  Reload    Help    Table 23  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Meaning    Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device     Opens the online help     39    Basic Settings 1 4 Load Save    1 4 Load Save    This dialog allows you to save the settings permanently in a configuration  profile  When you click  Set  in a dialog while the device is operating  the  device only saves the changes temporarily     The device allows you to keep multiple configuration profiles in the memory  so that you can quickly switch to other settings if required  Configuration  profiles can be saved in encrypted or unencrypted form  You also have the  option to export configuration profiles toa PC or an SCP or FTP server  or to  copy them back to the device from there     Unintentional changes to the settings may cause the connection between  your PC and the device to be terminated  To make sure the device remains  accessible  switch on the  Undo Modifications of Configuration  function  before changing settings  If the connection is then terminated  the device  loads the device configuration saved in the non volatile memory  NVM      External Memory    Parameters Meaning  Selected ENVM Shows the type of the external memory     Possible values   SD  
291. ustIpDscp      The device prioritizes IP data packets according to their DSCP value   The QoS Priority IP DSCP Mapping dialog displays the traffic class to  which the respective IP DSCP value is assigned  The device assigns  the data packets to a traffic class depending on their IP DSCP value  and thereby sorts them in the priority queue       The device assigns the changed VLAN priority to the data packet in  accordance with its DSCP value       Data packets that are not IP data packets are prioritized by the device  according to the value defined in the  Port Priority  column   Shows the traffic class   If you have defined the value untrusted in the  Trust Mode  column  the  device assigns the data packets to this traffic class        Possible values   05 4 3    In the QoS Priority 802 1D p Mapping dialog you assign the VLAN priority to  the traffic classes and thus the data packets to a priority queue of the port     Table 168  Table in the 0oS Priority Port Configuration dialog  cont      Buttons    Button  Set    Meaning   Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save      Table 169  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS    Release 2 0 02 2013 193    QoS Priority 6 2 Port Configuration    Button Meaning   Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Help Opens the online help     Table 169  Buttons  co
292. uthentication Server    This dialog allows you to define up to 8 authentication servers  An  authentication server authenticates and authorizes the users when the  device forwards the login data to the server     The device sends the login data to the specified primary authentication  server  If the server does not respond  the device contacts the specified  secondary authentication server that is highest in the table  If no response  comes from this server either  the device contacts the next server in the table           Table  Parameters Meaning  Index Shows a sequential number to which the table entry relates   The device automatically defines this number   Possible values   Eees  Name Shows the name of the server   To change the value  click the relevant field   Possible values   1  32 alphanumeric characters   Default setting  Default RADIUS Server   Address Specifies the IP address of the server     Possible values   Valid IPv4 address    Table 84  Table in the Security RADIUS Authentication Server dialog       RM GUI RSPS  104 Release 2 0 02 2013    Security    Parameters  UDP Port    Secret    Primary Server    Active    2 5 RADIUS    Meaning  Specifies the number of the UDP port on which the server receives  requests     Possible values    0   65535  default setting  1812    Exception  Port 2222 is reserved for internal functions   Shows         asteriks  when a password is specified with which the device  logs in to the server  To change the password  click the rel
293. v4 netmask   Default setting       Defines the IP address of a router via which the device accesses other  devices outside its own network     Possible values   Valid IPv4 address  Default setting         Table 11   IP Parameter  frame in the Basic Settings Network Global dialog    30    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Basic Settings 1 2 Network    Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Help Opens the online help     Table 12  Buttons    1 2 2 ARP Table    This dialog allows you to display the MAC and IP addresses of the  neighboring devices connected to the device  The device determines these  addresses using the Address Resolution Protocol  ARP  before the  connection to the corresponding neighboring device is set up for the first  time     Table  Parameters Meaning  Port Number of the device port to which the table entry relates   MAC Address Shows the MAC address of a device that responded to an ARP query to  this device port   IP Address Shows the IP address of a device that responded to an ARP query to this  device port     Table 13  Table in the Basic Settings Network ARP Table dialog     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 31    Basic Settings 1 2 Network    Parameters Meaning  Type Displays the ty
294. value 0 deactivates this setting     The device accepts the password if it contains at least as many numbers  as specified here     Possible values   0  16  default setting  1     The value 0 deactivates this setting     The device accepts the password if it contains at least as many special  characters as specified here     Possible values   0  16  default setting  1     The value 0 deactivates this setting     Table 37   Password Policy  frame in the Security User Management dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    63    Security    Table    2 1 User Management    Every user requires an active user account to gain access to the  management functions of the device  The table allows you to set up and  manage user accounts     To change settings click the desired parameter in the table and modify the    value     Parameters  User Name    Active    Password    Meaning   Shows the name of the user account    To create a new user account  you click  Create    Activates deactivates the user account     Possible values   Selected  The user account is active  The user accepts the login of a user with  this user name   Not selected  The user account is inactive  The user rejects the login of a user with  this user name     If only one user account exists with the administrator access role  this  user account is always active    Shows        asterisks  instead of the password with which the user logs  in  To change the password  click the relevant field     Possible values    6  
295. values   0  255 alphanumeric characters    Location Defines the location of the device     Possible values   0  255 alphanumeric characters    Table 5   System Data  frame in the Basic Settings  System dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 23    Basic Settings    Parameters  Contact    Device Type  Power Supply P1    Power Supply P2    Uptime    Temperature    C     1 1 System    Meaning  Defines the contact person for this device     Possible values   0  255 alphanumeric characters  Shows the product name of the device   Shows the status of the power supply unit on voltage supply  connection P1     Possible values    Present   Not present   Defective  Shows the status of the power supply unit on voltage supply  connection P2        Possible values    Present   Not present   Defective  Shows the time that has elapsed since this device was last  restarted        Possible values   Time in the format day s   hh mm ss    The middle field shows the current temperature in the device in   C     L This field specifies the lower temperature threshold in   C   If the temperature in the device falls below this value  the  device generates an alarm     T This field specifies the upper temperature threshold in   C   If the temperature in the device exceeds this value  the  device generates an alarm     Possible values    99  99  integer     You activate the monitoring of the temperature thresholds in the  Diagnostics Status Configuration Device Status dialog     The    Installation  
296. values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Reset Enables the port when disabled by the Port Monitor function    Help Opens the online help     Table 264  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 277    Diagnostics 8 3 Ports    8 3 9 Port Mirroring    The device ports to be reviewed are known as source ports  The device port  to which the device copies the data packets to be reviewed is called the  destination port  Only physical device ports are suitable to be source or  destination ports     In port mirroring  the device copies valid data packets transmitted and  received by the source ports to the destination port  This does not affect the  data traffic on the source ports during port mirroring  You can use a  management tool connected at the destination port  e g  an RMON probe  to  monitor the data traffic of the source ports     Operation  Parameters Meaning  Operation When the function is switched on  the device copies the data packets for    the select source ports to the destination port     Possible values   On  off  default setting                    Table 265   Operation  frame in the Diagnostics  Ports Port Mirroring dialog    Destination port    Parameters Meaning    Destination Port Specifies the destination port  The device copies the data packets from the  source ports to this device port     Possible values    lt Port number gt   default setting  no Port     You cannot specify as the destination port any device port that you alrea
297. ve dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Help Opens the online help     Table 244  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  262 Release 2 0 02 2013    Diagnostics 8 2 Report    8 2 6 Hardware State    This dialog provides information about the distribution and state of the flash  memory of the device     Information  Parameters Meaning  Operating Time Shows the total operating time of the device since it was delivered     Possible values   day s   hh mm ss    Table 245   Information  frame in the Diagnostics Report Hardware State dialog    Table  Parameters Meaning  Flash Region Shows the name of the respective memory area   Description Shows a description of what the memory uses the memory area for   Flash Sectors Shows how many sectors are assigned to the memory area     Number of Sector Shows how often the device has overwritten the sectors of the memory  Erase Operations area     Table 246  Table in the Diagnostics Report Hardware State dialog    Buttons  Button Meaning  Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device   Help Opens the online help     Table 247  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 263    Diagnostics    8 2 7 System Log    8 2 Report    The device logs important device internal events in a log file  system log      This dialog displays the log file  system log   The dialog allows you to search    the log file for search te
298. ver    synchronization failed   serverKissOfDeath  The SNTP server is overloaded  The device is requested to  synchronize itself with another SNTP server  If no other SNTP server  is available  the device asks at intervals longer than the setting in the   Request Interval  s   field  whether the server is still overloaded   serverUnsynchronized  The SNTP server is not synchronized with either a local or an external  reference clock   synchronization failed   versionNotSupported  The SNTP versions on the client and the server are incompatible with  each other   synchronization failed        Activates deactivates the connection to the SNTP server     Possible values     Selected  default value    The connection to the SNTP server is activated   The SNTP client has access to the SNTP server   Not selected   The connection to the SNTP server is deactivated   The SNTP client has no access to the SNTP server     Table 100  Table in the Time  SNTP Client dialog  cont      RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    121    Time 3 2 SNTP    Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Create Adds a new table entry    Remove Removes the selected table entry    Help Opens the online help     Table 101  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  122 R
299. volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Opens the online help     Table 298  Buttons    304    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Diagnostics 8 5 LLDP    8 5 2 Topology Discovery    Devices in a network send advertisements in packets called LLDP Data Units   LLDPDUs   The data sent and received via LLDPDUs is useful for many  reasons  For example  the device discovers which devices on a network are  neighbors  and through which ports they connect to each other     This dialog with its tabs allows you to map the network as well as discover  the devices connected with their capabilities     LLDP    This tab shows you the collected LLDP information for the neighboring  devices  This information enables the network management station to  map the structure of your network     When devices both with and without an active topology discovery function  are connected to a device port  the topology table hides the devices  without active topology discovery     When only devices without active topology discovery are connected to a  device port  the table will contain one line for this port to represent all  devices  This line contains the number of connected devices     The Forwarding Database  FDB  address table contains MAC addresses  of devices that the topology table hides for the
300. with a lower priority     Table 176  Table in the QoS Priority Queue Management dialog    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013 199    QoS Priority    Parameters  Min  Bandwidth        6 5 Queue Management    Meaning    Defines the minimum bandwidth for this traffic class when the device is  processing the priority queues of the ports with Weighted Fair Queuing     Possible values   0   100  default setting  0     The value entered in percent refers to the available bandwidth on the port   When you switch off the  Strict Priority  function for all traffic classes  the  maximum bandwidth is available on the ports for the Weighted Fair Queuing     The total of the bandwidths assigned to the individual traffic classes is a  maximum of 100     The value 0 means that the device does not reserve any bandwidth for this  traffic class     Table 176  Table in the QoS Priority Queue Management dialog  cont      Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings Load Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Help Opens the online help     Table 177  Buttons    200    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Redundancy    7 Redundancy    This menu allows you to configure and monitor the settings for redundancy  mechanisms    The    Redundancy Configuration User Manual    document contain
301. y   ENVM   the device overwrites the settings of the  Selected configuration  profile in the non volatile memory  NVM      If the  Config Priority  field has the value first  second or third and  the configuration profile is unencrypted  the  Security Status  frame in the  Basic Settings System dialog shows an alarm  In the  Monitoring  frame  in the Diagnostics Status Configuration Security Status dialog  you  specify whether the device monitors the parameter  Config load from  external NVM unsecure     Defines whether the device generates a copy on the external memory  when saving the configuration profile        Possible values   selected  default setting   The device generates a copy of the configuration profile on the  external memory when you click  Save  in the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog   Not selected  The device does not generate a copy of the configuration profile        Table 30  Table in the Basic Settings External Memory dialog  section   x3c   tblsheetnum gt  of 2     RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    53    Basic Settings 1 5 External Memory    Buttons   Button Meaning   Set Transfers the changes to the volatile memory  RAM  of the device  To  permanently save the changes afterwards  you open the Basic  Settings  Load Save dialog and click  Save     Reload Updates the fields with the values that are saved in the volatile memory   RAM  of the device    Help Opens the online help     Table 31  Buttons    RM GUI RSPS  54 Release 2 0 02 2013    Basic Settin
302. y Seamless Redundancy   HSR  215  HiView 9  HSR 215  HTTPS certificate 81  HTTPS server 80  HTTP server 78  l  Importing signature key  SSH  86  Industrial HiVision 10  74  Ingress filtering 184  Ingress rate limiter 155  Installation  GUI  13  IP access restriction 88  IP DSCP mapping 197  J  JAR file  GUI  251  Java Runtime Environment 13  L  LLDP 241  301  Load save device configuration 40  Login banner 108  Login banner  CLI  94  Login prompt  CLI  93  Login window 14  Log file  HTML  240  264  Log  audit trail  265  Loops 224  M  MAC address table 158  MAC flooding 96  MAC spoofing 96  Management access 28  73  Management VLAN 28  Media Redundancy Protocol 202  Memory  external 52  MRP 202    Index    N   Network load  ports   Non volatile memory  NVM   NVM    O  Operating instructions  GUI     P   Persistent event logging  Port configuration   Port configuration  QoS Priority   Port mirroring   Port priority   Port security   Port VLAN   Port VLAN ID   Pre login banner  Priority queue   PTP Boundary Clock  PTP Transparent Clock    Q    Queue management  QoS     R   RADIUS   RAM   RAM test   Rate limiter  Redundancy   Request interval  SNTP   Resetting log files  Resetting counters  Restart   Restarting device  Restricting management access  RFC   Ring structure   RMON probe   Root bridge  RSTP   RSTP    S    Save configuration  GUI     267    45    15    260   55   192   278   192   96   183   184   108   190   129  134  139  143    199    18    Save system information 
303. you to synchronize the system time in the device as an  SNTP client  As the SNTP server  the device makes the time information  available to other devices     The menu contains the following dialogs   Client  Server    3 2 1 Client    With this dialog you can define the settings with which the device operates  as an SNTP client     An an SNTP client the device obtains the time information from both SNTP  servers and NTP servers and synchronizes the local clock with the time of  the time server     Operation  Parameters Meaning  Operation When the function is switched on  the device operates as an SNTP client     Possible values   On  off  default setting     Table 97   Operation  frame in the Time  SNTP Client dialog    RM GUI RSPS  118 Release 2 0 02 2013    Time 3 2 SNTP  Configuration   Parameters Meaning   Mode Defines whether the device actively requests the time information from an    Request Interval  s     Disable Client after  successful  Synchronization    SNTP server known and configured in the network  Unicast mode  or  passively waits for the time information from a random SNTP server   Broadcast mode      Possible values   unicast  default setting   The device only takes the time information from the configured SNTP  server  The device sends Unicast requests to the SNTP server and  evaluates its responses   broadcast  The device obtains the time information from one or more SNTP or  NTP servers  The device only evaluates the Broadcasts or Multicasts  from these 
304. you want to use the graphical user  interface    L  Click on OK     The window with the graphical user interface will appear on the screen     RM GUI RSPS  14 Release 2 0 02 2013    Graphical User Interface    E Operating Instructions    The graphical user interface of the device is divided into the menu part   left  and the dialog part  right              2QFR 0    E _ Te                                  e Network  Device Status Security Status  IB Software ooo  B Load Save Vv Alarm Start Time    v Alarm Start Time F   gt  External Memory AlrmReason foo Coo      E  Port Contiguration z     Restart   System Data   Device View       8 Security Name IRSP ECE55501 5560    Time Location Hirschmann RSP oseo  Ej     Network Security  H  amp  Switching Contact Hirschmann Automation and Control GmbH A                   EJ a0sPriority     Redundancy       Device Type IRSP30 0803 Hv 0001        E  Diagnostics Power Supply 1  present  8   Advanced Power Supply 2  present  O Hep          Uptime 0 day s   2 36 55    Temperature    C  L fo far T fro                      a  J   L   g       E  E                      _sa   Reload         oading data ok    Figure 2  Graphical user interface of the device    RM GUI RSPS  Release 2 0 02 2013    Graphical User Interface    The menu shows the menu items  When you click a menu item  the user  interface displays the corresponding dialog in the dialog area             SQ E  00  bles  Ely Basic Settings  6 System    is Expand All  ie     U Collapse Al
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
Rekluse Motor Sports The z-Start™ Clutch YFZ    Lightolier Lytespan DRL35 User's Manual  Multimetro con Termometro IR  user manual  Marshall Amplification MG30DFX User's Manual  Web_PXA800-S-1A - Support  福島コトひらく レンタルオフィス・コワーキング利用規約 適用 本規約は    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file